manualshive.com logo in svg

Panasonic HYBRID IP-PBX KX-TDA100, Programming Manual

The Panasonic HYBRID IP-PBX KX-TDA100 offers seamless communication for businesses. With its comprehensive user manual available for free download on our website, users can easily access the necessary information to effectively utilize this advanced communication system. Visit manualshive.com to download the manual and explore the full potential of this outstanding product.

Share
Download
background image

8.1  [6-1] System Speed Dial

The System Speed Dialling Table is used to store frequently dialled numbers as well as callers who should be
automatically routed to certain extensions when they call (Calling Line Identification [CLI] distribution). The
System Speed Dialling Table is available for all extension users when making or receiving a call.
A maximum of 1000 System Speed Dialling numbers (e.g., telephone numbers, feature numbers) can be
programmed with other related parameters. 100 numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of
numbers, click the applicable tab.

Memory

Selects the System Speed Dialling Table to be programmed. Whether a tenant uses the basic System Speed
Dialling Table or the additional table (with MEC [KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200] or EMEC [KX-TDA600]
card) depends on the setting of 

System Speed Dial

 in 

8.6  [6-6] Tenant

.

Value Range

For KX-TDA30:

Basic Memory: the standard table
Expanded Memory: additional table (only available when an MEC card is installed to the PBX)

For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200:

Basic Memory: the standard table
Expanded Memory for Tenant 1–8: additional tables (only available when an MEC card is installed to the PBX)

For KX-TDA600:

Basic Memory: the standard table
Expanded Memory for Tenant 1–32: additional tables (only available when an EMEC card is installed to the
PBX)

Maintenance Console Location

8.1  [6-1] System Speed Dial

Programming Manual References

8.6  [6-6] Tenant—

System Speed Dial

Feature Guide References

1.6.1.5  Speed Dialling—Personal/System
1.18.1  Caller ID
2.2.3  Tenant Service

Name

Specifies a name for the System Speed Dialling number.

Value Range

Max. 20 characters

754

PC Programming Manual

8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

Summary of Contents for HYBRID IP-PBX KX-TDA100

Page 1: ...urchasing a Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 5 0000 or later KX TDA100 KX TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 5 0000 or later KX TDA600 PLMPR Software File Version 5 0000 or later ...

Page 2: ...rence Feature Guide References The Feature Guide explains what the PBX can do as well as how to obtain the most of its many features and facilities Sections from the Feature Guide are listed throughout this manual for your reference Installation Manual References The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX Sections from the Installation Manua...

Page 3: ...ot perform any shutdown operation or enter the power saving system standby mode while the Maintenance Console is connected to the PBX To perform either of the operations above first close the connection to the PBX Trademarks Microsoft Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries All other trademarks id...

Page 4: ...X TDA600CE are designed to interwork with the Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN of European countries Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN basic rate access Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN primary rate access ONP 2048 kbit s digital structured leased lines D2048S Panasonic Communications Co Ltd Panasonic Communications Comp...

Page 5: ...3 File 43 2 3 1 File Close 43 2 3 2 File Save 44 2 3 3 File Save As 45 2 3 4 File Exit 46 2 4 Disconnect 47 2 4 1 Disconnect Disconnect 47 2 5 Tool 48 2 5 1 Tool SD memory backup 48 2 5 2 Tool BRI Automatic Configuration 49 2 5 3 Tool NDSS Link Data Clear 50 2 5 4 Tool DXDP All OUS 51 2 5 5 Tool Simplified Voice Message Delete All Recording 52 2 5 6 Tool Simplified Voice Message Check Current Usag...

Page 6: ...ection Command KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 131 3 10 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type 132 3 11 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port 145 3 12 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Connection Command 151 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type 152 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port 167 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Connection Command 192 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA...

Page 7: ... 1 1 Slot Card Property DPH type Connection Command KX TDA30 only 347 3 47 1 1 Slot Card Property ESVM Type KX TDA30 only 348 3 48 1 2 Portable Station 350 3 49 1 3 Option 354 3 50 1 4 Clock Priority 356 4 2 System 357 4 1 2 1 Date Time Daylight Saving 358 4 2 2 1 Date Time Daylight Saving Date Time Setting 360 4 3 2 2 Operator BGM 361 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters 364 4 5 2 4 Week Table 385 4 6 2 4 Wee...

Page 8: ...p Member List 561 6 4 Extension 563 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 564 6 2 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings CLIP Generate 618 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 621 6 4 4 1 3 Wired Extension Speed Dial 626 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button 627 6 6 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Flexible button data copy 644 6 7 4 1 5 Wired Extension PF Button 645 6 8 4 1 6 Wired...

Page 9: ... NDSS Key Table 805 12 10 CO Incoming Call 807 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings 808 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings 811 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table 821 12 4 10 3 DDI DID Table Automatic Registration 824 12 5 10 3 DDI DID Table Name Generate 826 12 6 10 4 MSN Table 828 12 7 10 5 Miscellaneous 833 13 11 Maintenance 835 13 1 11 1 Main 836 13 2 11 2 PT Programming Access 855 13 3 11 3 Power Failure Transfer K...

Page 10: ...10 PC Programming Manual Table of Contents ...

Page 11: ...Section 1 Overview This section provides an overview of programming the PBX PC Programming Manual 11 ...

Page 12: ...o enter programming mode will be denied access Ways to Programme There are two programming methods PC Personal Computer Programming All features and settings of the PBX can be programmed through PC programming with Maintenance Console Installing and starting the Maintenance Console is described in Section 1 2 PC Programming Individual PC programming items are described in Section 2 Introduction of...

Page 13: ... on a white background below can be used when storing a name message password or other text entry data using a PC The available characters vary according to the model of PBX Table 1 Standard PC Programming Manual 13 1 1 2 Entering Characters ...

Page 14: ...Table 2 For CE model 14 PC Programming Manual 1 1 2 Entering Characters ...

Page 15: ...Table 3 For RU model PC Programming Manual 15 1 1 2 Entering Characters ...

Page 16: ...Table 4 For GR model 16 PC Programming Manual 1 1 2 Entering Characters ...

Page 17: ... USB driver When the PBX is first connected to the PC via USB you may be asked to select the appropriate USB driver Browse for and select the KX TDA USB driver that was installed previously 1 Copy the setup file of the Maintenance Console to your PC 2 Double click the setup file to run the installer 3 Follow the on screen instructions provided by the installation wizard Starting the Maintenance Co...

Page 18: ...default INSTALLER The Programmer Code authorises different programming levels and the Quick Setup is only available when you start the Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code Note There are 2 other Programmer Codes with limited authorisation Administrator Level default ADMIN and User Level default USER 1 2 2 Password Security b Click OK 5 Click Connect 6 Select your PBX model ...

Page 19: ...1 Starting the PBX for KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or 2 13 1 Starting the PBX for KX TDA30 in the Installation Manual and restart the PBX c Click Connect USB from the menu bar d Repeat step 4 to restart the Maintenance Console 9 Follow the instructions of the Quick Setup wizard and assign the basic items The system menu appears You may now begin programming the PBX PC Programming Manual 19 1 2 1 Installin...

Page 20: ...mmer code to access installer level PC programming All system programming settings are available The three programmer codes used for PC programming can be set through Maintenance Console For more information about programmer codes see 2 1 2 Access Levels CAUTION To the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password 1 Please provide all system passwords to the customer 2 To avoid unauthor...

Page 21: ...Section 2 Introduction of Maintenance Console This section serves as reference operating instructions when using the Maintenance Console software to programme the PBX PC Programming Manual 21 ...

Page 22: ...stem data file To start Maintenance Console in Interactive mode 1 Enter the relevant programmer code 2 Click OK The start menu will appear 3 Click Connect Connection options will be displayed Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre saved profile This option is only available when one or more profiles have been previously stored a Select the profile to use from the drop down list b If the sy...

Page 23: ...rts a pause Dial Type Auto Tone Auto Pulse Manual Specify the outgoing dialling method If Manual is chosen dialling must be done with a connected telephone Comment Max 40 characters Enter a comment to identify the set of values Port COMx Specify the number of the COM port assigned to the PC s modem interface Only available COM ports will be displayed Baud Rate bps 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 S...

Page 24: ...the port number used to access the PBX via LAN Enter the same port number that was input in Maintenance Port Number of 3 44 1 1 Slot Card Property CTILINK KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only or 3 33 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Gateway KX TDA30 only Connection Setting for ISDN Remote Setting Values Explanation Dial Number 30 digits consisting of 1 9 0 and comma Enter the telephone number to be dialled...

Page 25: ... the initial description of that menu option for example This option is only available at Installer level If a sentence like this does not appear under the heading the menu option is available at all levels The target users for each access level are as follows Access Level User User For end users Administrator For system administrators Installer For dealers and system installers The options availa...

Page 26: ...Voice Message Delete All Recording ü Simplified Voice Message Check Current Usage ü Call Pickup for My Group ü ü Extension List View ü ü ü ü ü ü Import Feature Speed Dial and Caller ID ü ü ü ü ü ü Import Incoming Call DDI DID Table ü ü Import ARS Leading Digit ü ü Import ARS Except Code ü ü Import ARS Routing Plan ü ü Import Wired Extension ü ü Import PS Extension ü ü Import Quick Dial Basic ü ü I...

Page 27: ...I Diagnosis ü ü ü File Transfer PC to PBX SD Card ü File Transfer PBX SD Card to PC ü SD Card File View and Load ü SD Card File Delete ü Message File Transfer PC to PBX ü Message File Transfer PBX to PC ü Error Log ü ü ü T1 E1 Signalling Bit Monitor for KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 E1 Signalling Bit Monitor for KX TDA30 ü T1 E1 Line Trace for KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 E1 Line Trace for KX TDA...

Page 28: ... U A I Toolbar ü ü ü ü ü ü Statusbar ü ü ü ü ü ü System Menu ü ü ü ü ü ü Window Menu Option Batch Interactive U A I U A I Cascade ü ü ü ü ü ü Tile Horz ü ü ü ü ü ü Tile Vert ü ü ü ü ü ü Help Menu Option Batch Interactive U A I U A I Help ü ü ü ü ü ü Additional Information ü ü ü ü ü ü About ü ü ü ü ü ü 28 PC Programming Manual 2 1 2 Access Levels ...

Page 29: ... 2 3 4 5 6 1 Menu Bar Provides access to file management and connection options as well as tools and utilities used in programming the PBX For details see Sections 2 3 File to 2 7 Help 2 Tool Bar Provides easy access to commonly used software functions Two tool bars are provided as follows File Contains icons for saving files For details see Section 2 3 2 File Save PC Programming Manual 29 2 1 3 S...

Page 30: ...ioned freely Click and drag the title bar of the menu to move it to another position It will automatically snap in to either the left side or right side of the main window if released there Otherwise it will float separately from the main window Whether the system menu is displayed or not can be chosen by selecting System Menu from the View menu 5 Status Bar The status bar displays information on ...

Page 31: ... previous screen Close Keeps any changes implemented and closes the current screen Apply Implements changes and remains on the same screen Refresh Implements changes updates displayed data and remains on the current screen Help Displays the relevant help topic for the current screen In addition many screens within the software display a small open folder icon beside lists of setting items Clicking...

Page 32: ...ns that the card is installed correctly in the PBX and is capable of being used normally Out of service means that the card is installed correctly in the PBX but has been temporarily removed from use This allows settings to be modified or software to be upgraded Fault means that the card is not installed in the PBX correctly or is not functioning correctly For more information see the Installation...

Page 33: ...the bottom of the Maintenance Console window System Menu Displays or hides the menu of PBX setting screens Window Cascade When multiple data screens are open displays all open screens overlapped with the title bars visible Tile Horz When multiple data screens are open displays all open screens side by side Tile Vert When multiple data screens are open displays all open screens vertically PC Progra...

Page 34: ...nge Wired Extension Portable Station VM Group DPT VM Group DTMF ICD Group PS Ring Group OGM DISA External Pager Analogue MODEM ISDN Remote Extension Numbers Names List Displays all available extensions of the types selected in Extension Type and names Click entries to select them and click the Add button when finished to add the selected extensions To deselect an entry click it again Value Range M...

Page 35: ...n the PBX see 2 6 2 Utility File Transfer PC to PBX SD Card Note Since selecting this option creates a blank system data file uploading this file to the PBX will overwrite all previous settings Use only when necessary To create a new system data file 1 From the start menu select New 2 Click the appropriate model number 3 Select whether an EMEC KX TDA600 or MEC KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 card is ...

Page 36: ...files that were created by the Maintenance Console for a supported PBX To upload a file opened here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX see 2 6 2 Utility File Transfer PC to PBX SD Card To open a system data file 1 From the start menu select Open The Open dialogue box will be displayed 2 Navigate to the folder containing the system data file you want to open 3 Select the file 4 Click Open I...

Page 37: ...is option is only available when one or more profiles have been previously stored a Select the profile to use from the drop down list b If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile enter it If the system password has been stored with the selected profile it does not need to be entered To enter the parameters manually select the PBX Model and confirm that the RS 232C radi...

Page 38: ...e Name if you want to use a pre saved profile a Select the profile to use from the drop down list b If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile enter it If the system password has been stored with the selected profile it does not need to be entered To enter the parameters manually select the PBX Model and confirm that the USB radio button is selected a Enter the system ...

Page 39: ...ile Name if you want to use a pre saved profile a Select the profile to use from the drop down list b If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile enter it If the system password has been stored with the selected profile it does not need to be entered To enter the parameters manually select the PBX Model and confirm that the LAN radio button is selected a Specify the con...

Page 40: ... has been stored with the selected profile it does not need to be entered To enter the parameters manually select the PBX Model and confirm that the Modem radio button is selected a Specify the settings as required For more details see the table below b Enter the system password for the PBX 3 Click Connect Connection Settings for Modem Setting Values Description Dial Number 1 9 0 comma T P W Enter...

Page 41: ...ISDN Remote 1 From the start menu select Connect The Login window will be displayed 2 Select a connection option Select a Profile Name if you want to use a pre saved profile a Select the profile to use from the drop down list b If the system password for the PBX has not been stored with the profile enter it If the system password has been stored with the selected profile it does not need to be ent...

Page 42: ...ckup of all profiles This allows you to use the original connection settings with the new Maintenance Console The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows Button Function Profile File Opens or saves profiles as separate files Save current profile Overwrites the previous settings with the current settings when a profile already exists A confirmation message will be displayed Save as n...

Page 43: ...s to the start menu To close a system data file From the File menu select Close If the system data file has not been saved a warning message will be displayed giving you the option to save the file Click Yes to save the file Click No to abandon the changes PC Programming Manual 43 2 3 1 File Close ...

Page 44: ...upload a file saved here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX see 2 6 2 Utility File Transfer PC to PBX SD Card To save a system data file From the File menu select Save If the data has never been saved the Save dialogue box will be displayed For more details see 2 3 3 File Save As 44 PC Programming Manual 2 3 2 File Save ...

Page 45: ...sfer PC to PBX SD Card To save a system data file with a new name 1 From the File menu select Save As 2 Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file 3 Enter a file name or select a file to overwrite 4 Click Save If choosing to overwrite another file a warning message will be displayed Click Yes to overwrite Click No to return to the previous screen PC Programming Manual 45 2 3 3 File ...

Page 46: ... Console From the File menu select Exit If the system data file being modified has not been saved a warning message will be displayed giving you the option to save the file Click Yes to save the file Click No to abandon the changes 46 PC Programming Manual 2 3 4 File Exit ...

Page 47: ...he PBX When this option is chosen system data is automatically backed up from the PBX to the SD memory card see 2 5 1 Tool SD memory backup To disconnect 1 From the Disconnect menu select Disconnect A confirmation message will be displayed 2 Click Yes PC Programming Manual 47 2 4 1 Disconnect Disconnect ...

Page 48: ...ry backup Saves system data from the PBX to the SD memory card Backup begins as soon as this option is chosen To back up system data From the Tool menu select SD memory backup 48 PC Programming Manual 2 5 1 Tool SD memory backup ...

Page 49: ...tus At any time on this screen you can click Close to return to the previous screen without saving To configure the BRI card 1 From the Tool menu select BRI Automatic Configuration 2 Select the BRI card to configure by clicking the Check cell and setting it to ON 3 Click OK The ports associated with the selected BRI card will be displayed on a new screen 4 Enter suitable Subscriber Numbers for the...

Page 50: ...rs it at the connected PBX To clear this data at other PBXs in the network it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs To clear the NDSS Link Data From the Tool menu select NDSS Link Data Clear A confirmation screen will be displayed Click OK to clear the data Click Cancel to keep the data and close the screen 50 PC Programming Manual 2 5 3 Tool NDSS Link Data Clear ...

Page 51: ...DP All OUS Sets the status of all DXDP XDP extension ports to OUS simultaneously To set all DXDP XDP ports to OUS 1 From the Tool menu select DXDP All OUS 2 Click OK PC Programming Manual 51 2 5 4 Tool DXDP All OUS ...

Page 52: ...d to SVM ESVM cards installed in the PBX To delete voice messages 1 From the Tool menu point to Simplified Voice Message and select Delete All Recording 2 Select the card from which to delete messages 3 Click OK 52 PC Programming Manual 2 5 5 Tool Simplified Voice Message Delete All Recording ...

Page 53: ...n SVM ESVM cards installed in the PBX For each message the type of message and the associated extension are displayed To view SVM message status From the Tool menu point to Simplified Voice Message and select Check Current Usage PC Programming Manual 53 2 5 6 Tool Simplified Voice Message Check Current Usage ...

Page 54: ... Group The Group Call Pickup feature number default 40 the extension user group number of the extension is assigned to first personal speed dial Note This tool can only be activated if all of the following conditions are met The first Quick Dial setting is empty or is already set to 0 0 is not used for another feature number The Group Call Pickup feature number has been assigned The Personal Speed...

Page 55: ...e as follows Type Detail Intercom Wired Extension VM Voice Mail Portable Station Wireless Extension Portable Station ICDG Incoming Call Distribution Group WG PS Ring Group VM DPT VM DPT Group VM DTMF VM DTMF Group Pager External Pager MODEM Analogue Modem ISDN Remote ISDN Modem OGM DISA DISA DSS DSS Console DPT I F CS PT interface CS SVM SVM Card To view extension information From the Tool menu se...

Page 56: ...ial and Caller ID Data Type Import Destination System Speed Dialling Number Location Name Name CO Line Access Number Telephone Number Dial CLI Destination CLI Destination Related programming 8 1 6 1 System Speed Dial Incoming Call DDI DID Table Data Type Import Destination Location Location DDI DID Number Dial In Number DDI DID Name Dial In Name DDI DID Destination Day Destination Day DDI DID Dest...

Page 57: ... to select no fields to select Related programming 10 3 8 3 Routing Plan Time Wired Extension Data Type Import Destination No Location selected automatically Extension Number Extension Number selected automatically Extension Name Extension Name selected automatically Related programming 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings PS Extension Data Type Import Destination No Location selected auto...

Page 58: ...DA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 system or tenant from the drop down list 6 If required select import fields When import fields can be selected the selection screen is displayed automatically Matching origin and destination fields are entered by default To change the destination for an import field select the preferred field from the drop down list To not import a field select the blank option from the d...

Page 59: ...click the type of data to export 2 Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the file 3 Enter a file name 4 Click Save When export fields are automatically selected the file will be saved When export fields can be selected the selection screen will be displayed automatically 5 For the Feature Speed Dial and Caller ID table when an EMEC KX TDA600 or MEC KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 card is i...

Page 60: ...ce Console and in the menu bar to users with the level of access being edited To modify displayed screens 1 From the Tool menu point to Screen Customize and then click the access level to modify 2 Select the items that you want to have displayed Clear the check box beside the names of items you do not want to have displayed Select the check box beside the names of items you want to have displayed ...

Page 61: ...C4 SLC8 IP EXT4 LCOT DID3 BRI IP GW4 SIP GW4 E1 Card CT Bus diagnosis DLC8 SLC8 IP EXT4 IP GW4 SIP GW4 E1 DTMF Receive test port DHLC4 SLC4 SLC8 MSG SVM Card DTMF receive test MSG2 SVM2 ESVM2 EXT CID path test EXT CID DSP DTMF generator receiver diagnosis E1 DSP DTMF receiver diagnosis E1 Framer IC alarm signal detection diagnosis E1 Framer IC error detection diagnosis E1 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TD...

Page 62: ...set the status of both the EXT CID card and the card in slot 1 to OUS 3 Click on the cell showing the card type A new window will be displayed 4 Select the Card Test option A new window will be displayed 5 Click Test to perform the test s The error report will be displayed When all tests are completed the words Test End will be shown on the last line of the output 6 Select an option Click Capture ...

Page 63: ...st option A new window will be displayed The card you selected in Step 3 will be shown in the Extension Line Slot No drop down list 5 From the CO Line Slot No drop down list select the slot number of the trunk card you want to test 6 From the CO Line Port No drop down list select the port number of the trunk you want to test 7 Click Test The error report will be displayed 8 Select an option Click ...

Page 64: ...ant to perform The available selections may vary depending on the hardware version of the card 6 Click Apply Preparation for the test is complete The test will start automatically 7 After the test is complete select Release and click Apply 8 Click Close to return to the Diagnosis screen 64 PC Programming Manual 2 6 1 Utility Diagnosis ...

Page 65: ...4 Utility SD Card File View and Load for all other files The PBX examines the header information of a file to determine 2 things whether the file contains supported data and which system component the file applies to Only files whose header information matches that of a system file supported by the PBX can be transferred Attempting to transfer any other type of file results in an error message The...

Page 66: ...16 PT1 T1 PE1 E1 PEM E M PBRI BRI PIPGW IP GW4 KX TDA0480 PIPGWH IP GW4 KX TDA0484 PIPGW16 IP GW16 PPRI23 PRI23 PPRI30 PRI30 POPB3 OPB PCTILINK CTI LINK PDID DID8 PIPEXT IP EXT16 PVOIPEX IP EXT16 PESLC ESLC16 EMSLC16 KX TDA600 only PEESLC ECSLC24 KX TDA600 only PELCOT ELCOT KX TDA600 only PEECHO EECHO KX TDA600 only PBUSS BUS S KX TDA600 only 66 PC Programming Manual 2 6 2 Utility File Transfer PC...

Page 67: ...on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DSSYS MPR DSSYS_S MPR 1 1 DSSYS file format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as DSSYS_S KX TDA100 KX TDA200 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DSYS MPR DSYS_SUB MPR 1 1 DSYS file format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as DSYS_SUB KX TDA600 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DLSYS EMPR DLSYS_S EMPR 1 1 DLSYS file format dat...

Page 68: ... IP GW4 DSIDID DID3 DSIE1 E1 DSIIPEXT IP EXT4 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DINI MPR DIDHLC DHLC8 DISLC SLC8 CSLC16 DIDLC DLC8 DLC16 DIBRI BRI DICSINF CSIF DILCOT LCOT8 LCOT16 DIT1 T1 DIE1 E1 DIEM E M DIOPB3 OPB3 DICTILIN CTI LINK DIEIO EIO DIIPGW1 IP GW4 KX TDA0480 DIIPGW2 IP GW4 KX TDA0484 DIIPGW3 IP GW16 DIPRI23 PRI23 68 PC Programming Manual 2 6 2 Utility File T...

Page 69: ...2 IP GW4 KX TDA0484 DLIIPGW3 IP GW16 DLIPRI23 PRI23 DLIPRI30 PRI30 DLIDID DID8 DLIIPEXT IP EXT16 To transfer files to the SD memory card 1 From the Utility menu select File Transfer PC to PBX SD Card The dialogue box will be displayed 2 Select the file to upload A window showing the upload progress will be displayed While transferring files to the SD memory card the PBX automatically renames them ...

Page 70: ...tem reset They can be analysed by your dealer to identify the source of a problem If there is only one error data file its name will be SYSERR If there is more than one file the files will be numbered in chronological order up to a maximum of 9 files To transfer files to the PC 1 From the Utility menu select File Transfer PBX SD Card to PC 2 Select the file to download from the list of files on th...

Page 71: ...of the desired file Only files containing program data whose filenames start with P can be selected 3 Click Detail The Detail screen will be displayed Header information from the chosen SD memory card file is displayed on the left 4 From the Card drop down list on the right select the card s whose software you want to update To update a specific card or port LPR cards select the slot number and ca...

Page 72: ...y KX TDA30 PSMPR DSSYS DSKEYSD KX TDA100 KX TDA200 PMPR DSYS DKEYSD KX TDA600 PLMPR DLSYS DLKEYSD To delete files from the SD memory card 1 From the Utility menu select SD Card File Delete 2 Click on the file to be deleted 3 Click Delete A confirmation screen will be displayed 4 Click OK The display will return to the SD Card File Delete screen 72 PC Programming Manual 2 6 5 Utility SD Card File D...

Page 73: ... information Uploaded files are automatically renamed as necessary If this location already contains an OGM it will be overwritten by the newly uploaded message To transfer OGMs to an MSG ESVM card 1 From the Utility menu select Message File Transfer PC to PBX 2 Select the target MSG ESVM card or ALL from the drop down list and click OK The Open dialogue box will be displayed 3 Select the message ...

Page 74: ...Transfer PBX to PC 2 From the upper drop down list select the target MSG ESVM card 3 From the lower drop down list select the messages to transfer To transfer a certain message select the number of that message To transfer all messages at once select ALL The Save dialogue box will be displayed 4 Enter a file name 5 Click Save 6 Click OK When you choose to transfer all messages each message is save...

Page 75: ...text file Minor Displays minor errors which affect only a certain part of system operation Major Displays major errors which affect operation of the whole system or result in system failure Clear Erases the stored error log information from both the screen and the PBX Log Information Displays probable causes of the errors and their solutions The items displayed on screen are as follows Item Descri...

Page 76: ...MPR slot 01 to 06 Free slot KX TDA200 00 to 11 00 MPR slot 01 to 11 Free slot KX TDA600 Basic Shelf 00 to 10 00 EMPR Card Slot 01 to 10 Free Slots Expansion Shelf 01 to 12 01 to 11 Free Slots 12 BUS S Card Slot ZZ Physical port number 01 to 16 For OPB3 card sub slot number 1 to 3 port number 1 to 4 will be displayed as follows Sub slot 1 of OPB3 11 to 14 Sub slot 2 of OPB3 21 to 24 Sub slot 3 of O...

Page 77: ...ighted in red until the next screen refresh is performed To view signalling bit information 1 From the Utility menu select T1 E1 Signalling Bit Monitor for KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 or E1 Signalling Bit Monitor for KX TDA30 2 From the Slot No drop down list select the target slot 3 From the Interval Timer drop down list select the number of seconds between each automatic screen refresh 4 Click...

Page 78: ...ct T1 E1 Line Trace for KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 or E1 Line Trace for KX TDA30 2 From the Slot No drop down list select the target slot 3 From the CH No drop down list select the target channel 4 Click Start Trace information will be displayed The information is automatically updated whenever the data being monitored changes 5 Click Stop to end the trace 6 Select an option Click Capture to sa...

Page 79: ... when the Start button is clicked Accumulation Trace Previously accumulated data is retrieved and displayed Error Accumulation Trace Previously accumulated error data is retrieved and displayed This trace shows the data snapshot that is taken just before a card resets To view trace data 1 From the Utility menu select ISDN QSIG Protocol Trace 2 From the Slot No drop down list select the target slot...

Page 80: ...ss of Signal RAI 301 Digital trunk RAI signal reception AIS 302 Digital trunk Alarm Indication Signal reception Frame Failure 300 Digital trunk frame failure Loss of Frame Counter of minor communication error CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check error SF Severely errored frame or Severe Framing Error FE Frame synchronisation bit error LV Line Code Violation SL Controlled slip To view digital trunk informat...

Page 81: ...val MAX ms Maximum time taken for a packet to arrive RTP Arrive Packet Interval MIN ms Minimum time taken for a packet to arrive To view IP extension information 1 From the Utility menu select IP Extension Statistical Information 2 From the Card Selection drop down list select the slot number 3 Click Execute The statistical information will be displayed 4 Select an option Click Capture if you want...

Page 82: ...paths KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 or 2 paths KX TDA30 DECT PSs can use up to 4 paths KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 or 2 paths KX TDA30 When using high density CSs DECT PSs can use up to 8 paths Group Call Number of PSs registered to the attached CS that are members of a PS Ring Group To view CS information 1 From the Utility menu select CS Information 2 From the Target CSI F Slot No drop down li...

Page 83: ...ollows Item Description PS No PS location number Only registered PSs will be displayed Extension Number Extension number of the PS Location Slot Slot number of the CS that the PS is registered with Location Port Port number of the CS that the PS is registered with To view PS information 1 From the Utility menu select PS Information 2 Click Refresh PC Programming Manual 83 2 6 15 Utility PS Informa...

Page 84: ...hange INS OUS Diagnosis commands Card installation Card deletion Remote reset LPR program download requests ISDN automatic setup requests BRI card Signalling Bit Monitor requests T1 E1 Line trace start requests T1 E1 ISDN QSIG Protocol Data Trace start requests Time setting CS program download requests File deletion When a function other than those listed above that cannot be performed while Timed...

Page 85: ...R PBX program file Contains the software to run the MPR board of the PBX PMPR_SUB Backup PBX program file KX TDA600 File Name Description DLSYS Main system data file Contains all of the current configuration data for the PBX DLSYS_S Backup main system data file PLMPR PBX program file Contains the software to run the EMPR board of the PBX PLMPR_S Backup PBX program file When new DSYS DSSYS DLSYS an...

Page 86: ...es is shown at the top 3 Select whether to replace the DSYS DSSYS DLSYS and PMPR PSMPR PLMPR files or not When no backup file is found the corresponding options are not available 4 Click OK A confirmation screen will be displayed 5 Select an option Click OK to reset the PBX If OK is clicked a final confirmation screen will be displayed Click Cancel to return to the main screen without copying file...

Page 87: ...D number pre assigned to the PBX used for PBX installation management This option is only available in some countries areas To view the Flash ROM ID From the Utility menu click Flash ROM ID Information PC Programming Manual 87 2 6 18 Utility Flash ROM ID Information ...

Page 88: ...al port that the PC uses correctly specified Is the baud rate correct The default setting and a safe rate is 19 200 bps Is the password correct Is the Maintenance Console not connected to the PBX by another connection method Q The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via USB A Is the USB cable firmly connected to both the PC and the PBX Is the USB driver on the PC running To confirm open ...

Page 89: ... PC to PBX SD Card Maintenance Console Software Q How do I confirm the software version of the PBX or installed cards A From 3 1 1 1 Slot click Summary Summary information including software versions is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX Q Not all of the characters of a setting can be displayed because the column is too narrow A Move the mouse to the line between the names of 2 setting i...

Page 90: ...tion within transmission range of the CS Has the Portable Station previously been registered at another location It is not possible to register a Portable Station at 2 locations so use the Forced De registration option to delete the previous registration Q I cannot delete the extension number of a Portable Station A First de register the Portable Station itself and then delete the extension number...

Page 91: ...us and then back to INS status Q How do I change the extension numbering plan from 3 digit numbers to 4 digit numbers A Perform the following steps 1 Open the 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main screen 2 Enter a 2 digit number in Leading Number or change No of Additional Digits from x to xx For more details see What is the procedure to modify the Numbering Plan in Numbering Q How do I set a 3 digit numb...

Page 92: ...ssibly overlap with another Leading Number So for example if 2 is already set as a Leading Number it is not possible to set 21 as another Leading Number because of the possible overlap of extension numbers The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by A feature number Another extension block A Dial setting see 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Quick Dialling see 4 9 2 6 2 Numbe...

Page 93: ...r An extension A Dial setting see 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Quick Dialling see 4 9 2 6 2 Numbering Plan Quick Dial In any of these cases choose another number Q I cannot change a feature number on the B NA DND Call Feature screen A The number you are trying to store is already being used by another call feature Please choose a different number Q How do I prevent extension numbers being automatically assi...

Page 94: ...e PBX s battery backup memory Incoming Call Log Outgoing Call Log including Last Number Redial Message Waiting SMDR Advice of Charge AOC Pay Tone Hospitality guest billing data ICD Group monitor log for supervisor PBX date and time Timed Reminder LPR Timed Update time PT handset headset volume PT SP PHONE volume PT ring volume PT display contrast ICD Group login status All extensions are set to Lo...

Page 95: ...rt you want to use to either QSIG Slave or QSIG Master Q How do I change the type of an extension port A Set the port to OUS status Then change DPT Type Type in the 3 5 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port window Q I have set the type of an extension port to DSS Console but I cannot apply this setting Error E000402 A The number entered in DPT Type Location No on the 3 5 1 1 Slot Port Property Ext...

Page 96: ... making trunk calls set all trunk groups for that COS to Block blue Q How do I modify the hold operation for SLTs A It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT using the SLT SLT Hold Mode option on the 4 17 2 9 System Options screen For more details see 1 13 1 Call Hold of the Feature Guide Q How do I set up an Incoming Call Distribution ICD group to receive trunk c...

Page 97: ...ell of the Extension Number column 3 Set Delayed Ring as necessary 4 Click Apply Note that it is necessary to set the extension number of the ICD group in advance Q I cannot set system speed dialling numbers from PC Console A Set the COS of the extension to which PC Console is connected to Manager class by setting Manager on the Extension Feature tab of the 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings...

Page 98: ...98 PC Programming Manual 2 7 1 Frequently Asked Questions FAQ ...

Page 99: ...Section 3 1 Configuration PC Programming Manual 99 ...

Page 100: ...irst greyed PBX image at the bottom of the screen Pre Install will be shown under the mouse pointer 2 Click Pre Install 3 Click Yes to confirm To select a different shelf of the PBX KX TDA600 only 1 Move the mouse pointer over the white PBX image at the bottom of the screen you wish to select Select Shelf will be shown under the mouse pointer 2 Click Select Shelf To access card properties 1 Move t...

Page 101: ...alled Super Hybrid Ports 1 01 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type DLC4 4 Port Digital Extension Card 1 02 04 Type A Slots SLC4 4 Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card BRI1 1 Port BRI Card 3 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type BRI2 2 Port BRI Card LCOT2 2 Port Analogue Trunk Card 3 10 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type LCOT4 4 Port Analogue Trunk Card DID3 3 Port DID Card 3 30 1 1 ...

Page 102: ...l KX TDA100 KX TDA200 Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming MPR Main Processing Card 1 fixed in Slot 00 3 3 1 1 Slot Card Property MPR DHLC8 8 Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card KX TDA100 6 KX TDA200 8 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type DLC8 8 Port Digital Extension Card DLC16 16 Port Digital Extension Card MSLC16 16 Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card SLC8 8 Port S...

Page 103: ...k Card KX TDA100 6 KX TDA200 8 3 27 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only IP GW4 KX TDA0480 KX TDA0484 4 Channel VoIP Gateway Card KX TDA100 4 KX TDA200 4 3 33 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Gateway IP GW16 16 Channel VoIP Gateway Card OPB3 Optional 3 Slot Base Card KX TDA100 4 KX TDA200 4 3 41 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only CTI LINK CTI Link ...

Page 104: ...Channel VoIP Extension Card 3 36 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension CSIF4 4 Cell Station Interface Card 16 None CSIF8 8 Cell Station Interface Card ELCOT16 16 Port Analogue Trunk Card 40 3 10 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type DID8 8 Port DID Card 40 3 30 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type BRI4 4 Port BRI Card 40 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type BRI8 8 Port BRI Card PRI23 PRI Card 23B chan...

Page 105: ... 3 Slot Base Card 16 3 41 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only CTI LINK CTI Link Card 1 can only be installed in the Basic Shelf 3 44 1 1 Slot Card Property CTILINK KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only EECHO16 16 Channel Echo Canceller Card 8 None For more information on cards and card installation see 1 3 1 Optional Equipment in the KX TDA600 Installation Manual PC Program...

Page 106: ...e name Value Range Card Type for KX TDA30 DLC4 4 Port Digital Extension Card DLC8 8 Port Digital Extension Card SLC4 4 Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card SLC8 8 Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card LCOT2 2 Port Analogue Trunk Card LCOT4 4 Port Analogue Trunk Card BRI1 1 Port BRI Card BRI2 2 Port BRI Card DID3 3 Port DID Card IP GW4 4 Channel VoIP Gateway Card IP EXT4 4 Channel VoIP Ext...

Page 107: ...y Card IP EXT16 16 Channel VoIP Extension Card MPR MPR Card Card Type for KX TDA600 DHLC8 8 Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card DLC16 16 Port Digital Extension Card DLC8 8 Port Digital Extension Card EMSLC16 16 Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card SLC8 8 Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card ESLC16 16 Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card CSLC16 16 Port Single Line Te...

Page 108: ...Property KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 3 44 1 1 Slot Card Property CTILINK KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 3 45 1 1 Slot Card Property DPH type KX TDA30 only 3 47 1 1 Slot Card Property ESVM Type KX TDA30 only Feature Guide References None Status Indicates the card status reference only Note that MPR card status is always displayed as Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is ...

Page 109: ...and the VoIP version on the right as follows Example 1 002 1 001 For IP EXT4 cards only the VoIP version is displayed Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location 3 2 1 1 Slot Summary Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 109 3 2 1 1 Slot Summary ...

Page 110: ...s related EMEC or MEC card data Note that when an EMEC or MEC card is installed in the PBX any SMDR data stored in the PBX is cleared Value Range None Installed Maintenance Console Location 3 3 1 1 Slot Card Property MPR Installation Manual References For KX TDA30 2 5 8 MEC Card KX TDA3105 For KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 3 2 MEC Card KX TDA0105 For KX TDA600 2 3 2 EMEC Card KX TDA6105 Programming Manual...

Page 111: ...Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 8 Software Upgrading PC Programming Manual 111 3 3 1 1 Slot Card Property MPR ...

Page 112: ...erty Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SLT Pulse Dial Mode Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area Value Range Normal Sweden New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SLT Off Hook Time Specifies the minimum length that ...

Page 113: ...lue Range 8 n n 12 63 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SLT Pulse Maximum Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial Value Range 8 n n 9 20 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guid...

Page 114: ...ue Range Disable The PBX disconnects the line to prevent placing the call on hold Enable The PBX places the call on consultation hold Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 13 3 Call Splitting Flash Timing Min Specifies the minimum length that a signal sent from an SLT must be for the PBX to recognise it ...

Page 115: ...de References None DTMF R STD Detection Time Specifies the minimum length that a DTMF tone must be for the PBX to recognise it as a DTMF tone Value Range 2 n n 1 31 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SLT Power Supply KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Selects the voltage that enables an SLT to a...

Page 116: ...is is only available with SLC8 cards Value Range None Caller ID Maintenance Console Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Installation Manual References For KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 5 6 EXT CID Card KX TDA0168 For KX TDA600 2 7 6 EXT CID Card KX TDA0168 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None APT SLT Parallel Ring Enables an SLT connected in parallel to an APT to...

Page 117: ...onsole Location 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 9 Parallelled Telephone PC Programming Manual 117 3 4 1 1 Slot Card Property Extension Type ...

Page 118: ...elf number Maintenance Console Location 3 5 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 5 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port or channel number ref...

Page 119: ...5 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 1 1 Extension Port Configuration Telephone Type Indicates the connected telephone type reference only The number of all connected telephones and Cell Stations can be viewed by clicking Port Type View Value Range DPT 15V DPT 40V DPT is connected APT 15V APT is connected DSS DSS Console is connected...

Page 120: ...ort Property Extension Port Programming Manual References 3 6 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port To change the extension number of a wired extension follow the steps below 1 Type the new extension number then click Apply 2 Set the status of the extension port to OUS then INS When changin...

Page 121: ...his setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to S Hybrid Value Range On XDP enabled The main telephone and sub telephone have different extension numbers This is called XDP Mode Off XDP disabled The main telephone and sub telephone both have the main telephone s extension number This is called Parallel Mode Maintenance Console Location 3 5 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Por...

Page 122: ...en changing the type of a port for which one or more SDN buttons are set except when changing between PC Console and Telephone all SDN buttons customised for that device will be deleted When you attempt to apply the new settings a warning message is displayed showing the slot and port number for which SDN buttons will be deleted If you do not wish to delete SDN buttons for this port click Cancel V...

Page 123: ...rning message is displayed showing the slot and port number for which SDN buttons will be deleted If you do not wish to delete SDN buttons for this port click Cancel Value Range For KX TDA30 Location number for DSS Console 1 4 Location number for PC Console 1 2 For KX TDA100 KX TDA200 1 8 For KX TDA600 Location number for DSS Console 1 64 Location number for PC Console 1 8 Maintenance Console Loca...

Page 124: ... 4 For KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 1 12 Maintenance Console Location 3 5 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group Headset OFF ON Turns on or off the use of a headset with a DPT This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to DPT DPT S DPT S Hybrid or S Hybrid S DPT Value Range Headset OFF H...

Page 125: ...PT S Hybrid S Hybrid XDP S Hybrid SLT or S Hybrid S DPT This setting is not available for the KX T7200 the KX T7451 APTs or SLTs Value Range A 64 ms 697 Hz 64 ms 852 Hz B 32 ms 697 Hz 32 ms 852 Hz C 128 ms 697 Hz 128 ms 852 Hz D 32 ms 697 Hz 96 ms 852 Hz Maintenance Console Location 3 5 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Progra...

Page 126: ...5 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 6 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 5 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide References...

Page 127: ...References None Total Count Indicates the total number of each type of telephone and CS connected to the PBX reference only With the KX TDA30 CSs are counted on the basis of the number of extension ports to which they are connected with the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 CSs are counted on the basis of the number of CSIF ports in service plus the number of extension ports to which CSs are connected...

Page 128: ...1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 8 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port numbe...

Page 129: ...US The CS is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the CS Maintenance Console Location 3 8 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References 3 9 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port Connection Command KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Feature Guide References None CS Name Specifies the name of the CSIF port Value Range Max 20 charact...

Page 130: ...Feature Guide References None 130 PC Programming Manual 3 8 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only ...

Page 131: ...SI F Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the CS out of service This enables a temporary non use of the CS for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 9 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F Port Connection Command KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References 3 8 1 1 Slot Port Property CSI F P...

Page 132: ... seizing a trunk before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 0 5 n n 1 16 s Maintenance Console Location 3 10 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CO Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on ...

Page 133: ...intenance Console Location 3 10 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Bell Detection Bell Off Detection Timer Specifies the duration of the bell off detection timer If the PBX receives no bell signal from the telephone company for the length of time specified here the PBX treats the call as lost Value Range 1 0 s 15 0 s Maintenance Console...

Page 134: ...the pulse inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 630 ms 830 ms 1030 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 10 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Low Speed Pulse Dial Pulse Break Specifies the break for a low speed pulse dial This is the ratio between the brea...

Page 135: ...t Feature Guide References None Low Speed Pulse Dial Make Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a low speed pulse dial Low Speed Pulse Dial Pulse Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here Value Range 4 n n 3 15 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 10 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References 3 11 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Feature...

Page 136: ...e 4 n n 4 18 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 10 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References 3 11 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Feature Guide References None High Speed Pulse Dial Make Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a high speed pulse dial High Speed Pulse Dial Pulse Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here Value Range 4 n ...

Page 137: ... is installed on the LCOT ELCOT card reference only Value Range None Caller ID Card Maintenance Console Location 3 10 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References 3 11 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Caller ID Detection Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID Signalling Selects the type of Caller ID signalling provided by the telephone company Value Range FSK...

Page 138: ... 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID FSK Carrier Detection Enables the PBX to detect the carrier when receiving Caller ID To enable this setting Caller ID Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 10 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID FS...

Page 139: ...able Maintenance Console Location 3 10 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID FSK Detection Start Timer Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before attempting to detect Caller ID information after receiving a call To enable this setting Caller ID Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to...

Page 140: ...ferences 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID DTMF Start Code 1 and Start Code 2 Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series Start Code 1 is prior to Start Code 2 Value Range None A B C D Maintenance Console Location 3 10 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID DTMF Information Sta...

Page 141: ...rty LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID DTMF Information Code PRIVATE OUT OF AREA TECHNICAL REASON UNKNOWN NUMBER RESTRICTED NUMBER Specifies the number used to identify each type of information code Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 3 10 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manu...

Page 142: ...e frequency of the pay tone appropriate to your telephone company Value Range 12kHz 16kHz Maintenance Console Location 3 10 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 3 Call Charge Services Pay Tone Pay Tone Gain KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Specifies the signal strength of the pay tone Value Range 0 31 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 1...

Page 143: ...Charge Services Pay Tone Pay Tone Pulse MAX KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Specifies the maximum length that a received pay tone signal can be for the PBX to recognise it as a pay tone signal Value Range None 8 n n 1 250 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 10 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 3 Call Charge Services Pay Tone Pay Tone ...

Page 144: ...while end talk KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Enables the PBX to send a flash signal at the end of call to demand a pay tone signal Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 10 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 3 Call Charge Services 144 PC Programming Manual 3 10 1 1 Slot Card Property LCO type ...

Page 145: ...sole Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number PC Programm...

Page 146: ...mn and then click Command Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References 3 12 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Busy Out Status Indicates the Busy Out status reference only Value Range Normal Busy Out Maintenance Console Location 3 11...

Page 147: ...equired by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line When None is selected here the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected Value Range None 6 5 ms 8 n n 1 112 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 10 Calling Party Control CP...

Page 148: ... Manual References None Feature Guide References None Reverse Detection Selects the type of trunk call for which the reverse signal from the telephone company is detected Value Range Disable For no trunk call Outgoing For outgoing trunk calls only Both Call For both outgoing and incoming trunk calls Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References Non...

Page 149: ... KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Enables the PBX to receive a pay tone signal from the telephone company Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 3 Call Charge Services Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause Value Range 1 5 s 2 5 s 3 5 s 4 5 s Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot...

Page 150: ...ort Property LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 7 External Feature Access EFA Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected during which the PBX cannot seize the line Value Range 0 5 s 1 5 s 2 0 s 4 0 s 12 0 s Maintenance Console Location 3 11 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Referen...

Page 151: ...3 11 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 12 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 11 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Feature Guide References None PC Prog...

Page 152: ...ng Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T202 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the request to use an ISDN line as a TIE line Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service ISDN...

Page 153: ...Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T302 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an incoming call Applies to overlap receiving Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References Non...

Page 154: ...mum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call Applies to overlap sending Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T305 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC disconnection message to ISDN Valu...

Page 155: ...References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T309 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link before disconnecting the call Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T310 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX ...

Page 156: ...lue Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T316 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programm...

Page 157: ...ecifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T322 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message Value Rang...

Page 158: ...ure Guide References None ISDN CO QSIG Master QSIG Slave T3D9 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in Call by Call mode Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T200 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after se...

Page 159: ...0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T203 Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2 Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Reference...

Page 160: ...ween each digit on an incoming call Applies to overlap receiving Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP call setting message to ISDN Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Co...

Page 161: ... ISDN Extension T305 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC disconnection message to ISDN Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T306 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC d...

Page 162: ...0 6000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T308 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN Value Range 0 600 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual Ref...

Page 163: ...ISDN Extension T310 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T312 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP c...

Page 164: ... 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T320 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for packet protocol Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ...

Page 165: ... that the PBX tries to establish L2 in Permanent mode Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension T3D9 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in Call by Call mode Value Range 0 3000 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 13 1 1 Slot Card ...

Page 166: ...Feature Guide References None 166 PC Programming Manual 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type ...

Page 167: ...e Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number PC Programming...

Page 168: ...Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY 1 30 4 1 QSIG Standard Features SUMMARY Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port comma...

Page 169: ...ing Manual References None Feature Guide References None Status Message Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network Value Range No Transmission Status Message is not sent When Mandatory error detection Send the Status Message when an error Mandatory is detected When Option Mandatory error detection Send the Status Message when an error Option or Mandatory is detected Maintenance Co...

Page 170: ...ogramming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO Parameters for ISDN CO are not applicable for the BRI extension port Shelf KX TDA600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position refere...

Page 171: ...n in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group In this case an MSN can be assigned Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private...

Page 172: ...erty BRI Port Programming Manual References 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line I...

Page 173: ...er digit timer expires Overlap The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Extension Inter digit 4 17 2 9 System Options Option 2 ISDN en Bloc Dial as End of Dial for en Bloc mode 5 4 3 1 4 Dialling Plan Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Int...

Page 174: ...to P MP Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Networking Data Transfer Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG Slave or QSIG Master A maximum of two ports of each BRI card can be assigned ...

Page 175: ...ual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 11 ISDN Extension Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property ...

Page 176: ...te network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 11 ISDN Extension Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command Va...

Page 177: ...lable when Port Type on this screen is set to Extension Value Range Ring All Extension for MSN Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN Ring an Extension for MSN Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 11 ISDN Extension ISDN Exten...

Page 178: ...y Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 178 PC Programming Manual 3 14 1 1 Slot...

Page 179: ...assigned Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This col...

Page 180: ...ds 6 SwissNET2 7 SwissNET3 8 Euro ISDN Standard 14 France Domestic 19 Finland 20 Norway 27 Australia 51 US National ISDN 2 Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY L1 Mode Selects the active mode of L1 Layer 1 on the BRI port Value Range Call Permanent Main...

Page 181: ...1 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY Access Mode Selects the configuration of the BRI port Value Range P P Point to Point P MP Point to multipoint Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY TEI Mode Specifies the TEI mode assigned to the BRI...

Page 182: ...f position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 182 PC Programm...

Page 183: ...assigned Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This col...

Page 184: ...work Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service 1 30 3 Virtual Private Network VPN Calling Party number Numbering Plan ID Public Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks Value Range Unknown ISDN Telephony National St...

Page 185: ... the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks Value Range Unknown ISDN Telephony National Standard Private Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Called Party number Type of Number Public Private Selects the type of number that applies to incoming tru...

Page 186: ...4 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only 186 PC Programming Manual 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Propert...

Page 187: ...n For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command...

Page 188: ...RI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 1 21 1 3 Advice of Charge AOC 1 21 1 5 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P 1 21 1 7 Call Transfer CT by ISDN 1 21 1 8 Three party Conference 3PTY by ISDN 1 21 1 10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation...

Page 189: ...nce only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None PC Programming Manual 189 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port ...

Page 190: ...ce Console Location 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is...

Page 191: ...y BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS CCBS Delete Digits Specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the specified type initiated by the CCBS feature from the network CCBS Type on this screen specifies the applicable type of call Value Range 0 15 Maintenance Console...

Page 192: ...3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Feature Guide References None 192 PC ...

Page 193: ... KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number P...

Page 194: ...k slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY 1 30 4 1 QSIG Standard Features SUMMARY Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers...

Page 195: ...andatory Send the Status Message when an error Option or Mandatory is detected Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Status Receive Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status of the call Value Range Ignore Igno...

Page 196: ...gramming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Line Coding Selects the line coding type of the PRI PCM Pulse Code Modulation for the port Value Range B8ZS AMI Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Frame Sequence Selects the type of frame sequence for the po...

Page 197: ... reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual R...

Page 198: ...er PBX ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group In this case an MSN can be assigned Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PR...

Page 199: ...Property PRI Port Connection Command KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Feature Guide References None Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected...

Page 200: ... a time Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Extension Inter digit 4 17 2 9 System Options Option 2 ISDN en Bloc Dial as End of Dial for en Bloc mode 5 4 3 1 4 Dialling Plan Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Networ...

Page 201: ...uide References 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Loopback Test started by Network Enables a loopback test started from the network side to be performed on the PRI23 card Note The version of the PRI23 card must be 2 000 or later Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References ...

Page 202: ... only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References Non...

Page 203: ...RI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of servic...

Page 204: ...roperty PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 11 ISDN Extension Network Configuration Shelf KX TDA600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide R...

Page 205: ... Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group In this case an MSN can be assigned Value Range CO For connecting to public network Extension For connecting to extension QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For c...

Page 206: ... KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References 3 17 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Connection Command KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Feature Guide References None Network Type Selects the network type of the port Value Range 0 56 2 UK Domestic 5 Netherlands 6 SwissNET2 7 SwissNET3 8 Euro ISDN Standard 14 France Domestic 19 Finland 20 Norway 27 Australia 51 US National ISDN 2 Maintenance Consol...

Page 207: ...s the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only PC P...

Page 208: ...ork master port Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Co...

Page 209: ...Numbering Plan ID Public Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public and private networks Value Range Unknown ISDN Telephony National Standard Private Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Calling Party number Type of N...

Page 210: ... Standard Private Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Called Party number Type of Number Public Private Selects the type of number that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks Value Range Unknown International National Network Subscrib...

Page 211: ...anual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number PC Programming Manual 211 3 16 1 1 Slot ...

Page 212: ...on QSIG Slave For connecting to private network slave port QSIG Master For connecting to private network master port Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port...

Page 213: ...1 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 1 21 1 3 Advice of Charge AOC 1 21 1 5 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P 1 21 1 7 Call Transfer CT by ISDN 1 21 1 8 Three party Conference 3PTY by ISDN 1 21 1 10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP ...

Page 214: ... number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the specified type initiated by the CCBS feature from the network CCBS Type on this screen specifies the applicable type of call Value Range 0 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 10 Compl...

Page 215: ...t KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 17 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Connection Command KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX...

Page 216: ... Guide References None Frame Sequence Selects the type of frame sequence used for communications Value Range D4 ESF Maintenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ESF Frame Sequence Selects the values for C bit and D bit To enable this setting Frame Sequence on this screen should b...

Page 217: ... Slot Card Property T1 type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None LIU Receive Option Selects the receiving level Receive Equalisation of LIU Value Range Automatic 6 dB 12 dB 18 dB 24 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Ref...

Page 218: ...a DDI DID or TIE line before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 32 n n 1 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References Non...

Page 219: ...00 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DTMF Tone DTMF Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 64 16 n n 0 11 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual R...

Page 220: ...Range n 42 0 n 0 31 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Break Specifies the break for pulse digits This is the ratio between the break on hook signal and make off hook signal in a pulse dial Value Range 60 67 Maintenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot...

Page 221: ...t pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 630 ms 830 ms 1030 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial CO Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not For outgo...

Page 222: ...tenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Minimum MAKE Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial Value Range 8 n n 1 5 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual R...

Page 223: ...cifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal from an SLT connected to an OPX Value Range 8 n n 3 63 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Flash Width OPX Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal sent from an SLT connected to an OPX that th...

Page 224: ... 1 Slot Card Property T1 type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Minimum BREAK Width TIE Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal sent from a TIE line Value Range 8 n n 3 63 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual Referen...

Page 225: ...TMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID Information End Code Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenan...

Page 226: ...ed to detect the end of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 18 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID 226 PC Programming Manual 3 18 1 1 Slot Card Property T1 type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only ...

Page 227: ...y T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CH Indicates the channel number reference only Value ...

Page 228: ...hannel is in service OUS The channel is out of service Fault The channel is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance C...

Page 229: ...Value Range Undefined Not assigned GCOT Ground Start Central Office LCOT Loop Start Central Office DDI DID Direct Dialling In Direct Inward Dialling TIE E M TIE Line OPX Off Premise Extension Maintenance Console Location 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 23 1 T1 Line Service Trunk Property Selects th...

Page 230: ...e on this screen is set to DDI DID Value Range None 80 n n 2 75 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 10 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection CPC Signal Detection LCO GCO Outgoing Incoming Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on ...

Page 231: ...ed Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the T1 channel Value Range 10 pulse s 20 pulse s Maintenance Console Location 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 4 Dial Type Selection Wink Signal Time Out Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a...

Page 232: ...gits to the trunk when the wink signal is received Maintenance Console Location 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Sending Caller ID to TIE Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when the channel type is TIE Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Por...

Page 233: ...k tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone This setting is only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to DDI DID Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Dial Tone to Extension Enables the PBX to send a dial tone t...

Page 234: ...ual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 1 5 4 9 Special Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal Value Range None 16 n n 1 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References ...

Page 235: ... Range 0 5 s 1 5 s 2 0 s 4 0 s 12 0 s Maintenance Console Location 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 6 Flash Recall Terminate PC Programming Manual 235 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only ...

Page 236: ...rt KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the channel out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 20 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Connection Command KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port ...

Page 237: ...ole Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Frame Sequence Selects the type of frame sequence for the E1 card Value Range PCM30 PCM30 CRC Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Frame Option Selects the value for C bit and D bit Value Range...

Page 238: ...he dialled digits correctly Value Range 32 n n 1 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Answer Detection Timer Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to recognise the answer signal This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 32 n n...

Page 239: ...ting level Transmit Pulse Amplitude of LIU reference only Value Range Mode 1 Mode 8 Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None LIU Receive Option Selects the receiving level Receive Equalisation of LIU Value Range Automatic 6 dB 12 dB 18 dB 24 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type P...

Page 240: ...MF Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter digit pause Value Range 64 16 n n 0 11 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Break Specifies the break for pulse digits This is the ratio between the break on hook signal and make off hook signal in a pulse dial Value Range 60 6...

Page 241: ... Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the pulse inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 630 ms 830 ms 1030 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual Reference...

Page 242: ...l References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Maximum BREAK Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial Value Range 8 n n 9 20 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Minimum MAKE Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial Value ...

Page 243: ... Guide References None Flash Minimum BREAK Width Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal sent from an E1 line Value Range 8 n n 3 63 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Flash Width Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal sent from an E1 line that the PBX can reco...

Page 244: ...es Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID Information End Code Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None 2...

Page 245: ... the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 21 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID PC Programming Manual 245 3 21 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type ...

Page 246: ...Inter digit Timer Specifies the pseudo answer time This setting is available only when Option 1 or Option 3 is selected in DR2 Setting Type on this screen Value Range 3 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 22 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Bit Position for Dial Pulse Selects the position of the pulse dial control bit...

Page 247: ... B bit Maintenance Console Location 3 22 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Forced Release Enables the PBX to send a forced release signal Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 22 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC ...

Page 248: ...l Value Range Type 1 A bit 0 Type 2 A bit 1 Type 3 B bit 0 Type 4 B bit 1 Type 5 A bit 1 B bit 1 Maintenance Console Location 3 22 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Wink Signal Width Specifies the length of a wink signal Value Range 32 n n 4 9 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 22 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line S...

Page 249: ...Length Answer Specifies the length of an answer signal Value Range 150 ms 600 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 22 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None E M P Pulse Length Clear Specifies the length of a clear signal Value Range 150 ms 600 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 22 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Se...

Page 250: ...Specifies the mode for call charge meter pulses Value Range No Detection Meter pulses are not sent or received Outgoing call only Sends a call charge meter pulse for outgoing trunk calls Both calls Sends and receives call charge meter pulses Maintenance Console Location 3 22 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Meter Pu...

Page 251: ...ulse Value Range 8 n n 1 80 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 22 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSP Gain Adjustment DTMF Transmit Specifies the output power of the DTMF signal sent from the DSP Digital Signal Processor Value Range 12 dB 3 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 22 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Sig...

Page 252: ...rences None DSP Gain Adjustment MFC R2 Transmit Specifies the output power of MFC R2 signals sent from the DSP Value Range 31 0 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 22 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSP Gain Adjustment MFC R2 Receive Specifies the strength range within which an MFC R2 signal must be for the DSP to re...

Page 253: ...gramming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Frame Error Detection Error Rate Specifies the number of frame errors per second which the PBX needs to recognise a remote alarm To enable this setting Frame Error Detection Error Detection on this screen should be set to Yes Value Range No limit 16 n n 1 7 errors s Maintenance Console Location 3 22 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type Line S...

Page 254: ...ard Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ANI Service ANI Max digits Specifies the maximum number of digits to be received via ANI when receiving a call with ANI Value Range None 1 16 Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None MFC R2 T...

Page 255: ...le Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None MFC R2 Timer Disappearance Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC R2 disappearance signal sent from the telephone company Value Range 1 30 s Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References...

Page 256: ...es the code used to indicate the end of an ANI number Value Range ANI Complete 1 1 15 ANI Complete 2 4 Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group l Code Assignment ANI Reject Specifies the code used to reject an ANI number Value Range 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1...

Page 257: ...References None Group l Code Assignment End of Digit Timer Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for further signal before detecting the end of digit of an ANI number Value Range 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group ll Code Assignment G ll Code Outgoing Call Specifies ...

Page 258: ...ctively Value Range Undefined Subscriber Operator Collect Call Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group ll Code Assignment Group ll ANI Specifies the Group ll ANI start code Value Range 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Man...

Page 259: ...2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None MFC R2 Group 1 E1 MFC R2 Group1 code Specifies the code value of the Group 1 code when the received Group 1 code is Value Range 11 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 23 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 259 3 23 1 1 Slot Ca...

Page 260: ...ignment ANI Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send an ANI number Value Range 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group A Code Assignment ANI N 1 Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the N 1 th digit of an ANI number Value ...

Page 261: ...mming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group A Code Assignment Set up Speech Path Specifies the setup speech path code sent to the telephone company Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group A Code Assignment First Request Specifies the code ...

Page 262: ...Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group A Code Assignment N 1 Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the N 1 th digit of an ANI number Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Sett...

Page 263: ...de Assignment N 3 Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the N 3 th digit of an ANI number Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group B Code Assignment Idle 1 Specifies the code used normally to inform the telephone company that ...

Page 264: ...nance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group B Code Assignment Idle 3 Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is idle when the call is disconnected by the caller Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Card Pro...

Page 265: ... the telephone company that the received number is not defined Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group B Code Assignment Congestion Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the network is congested Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Con...

Page 266: ...ences None Group B Code Assignment No Billing Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the call is not charged Value Range Undefined 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group B Code Assignment Collect Call Reject Specifies the code used to inform the telephone com...

Page 267: ...Console Location 3 24 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 267 3 24 1 1 Slot Card Property E1 type MFC R2 Setting 2 ...

Page 268: ...Location 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CH Indicates the channel number reference only Value Range channel number 268 PC Program...

Page 269: ...click Command Value Range INS The channel is in service OUS The channel is out of service Fault The channel is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance C...

Page 270: ...Range Public Use the DIL DDI DID method to distribute incoming trunk calls Private Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs Maintenance Console Location 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY 1 30 1 TIE Line Service CO Dial Mode Se...

Page 271: ...ANI Automatic Number Identification numbers from the E1 line Value Range DTMF Pulse MFC R2 Undefined Maintenance Console Location 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 22 1 E1 Line Service Receive Digits Specifies the maximum number of digits to be received from a DDI DID number when receiving a call with the DDI DID number Value Range 0 ...

Page 272: ... 75 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 10 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the E1 channel Value Range 80 ms 160 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Referenc...

Page 273: ...he trunk is released Value Range 64 n n 1 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Start Signal Type Selects the type of the start signal Value Range Immediate Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires Wink Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is recei...

Page 274: ...e Receiving Caller ID from TIE Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when Channel Type on this screen is set to E M P or E M C Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network ...

Page 275: ... 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Answer Wait Timer Selects the length of time that the PBX waits for the called outside party to answer an outgoing trunk call The line will be disconnected automatically when this timer expires Value Range None 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min Maintenance Console Location 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Progr...

Page 276: ...ial Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal Value Range None 16 n n 1 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected during which the PBX cannot seize the line Value Range 0 5 s 1 5 s 2 0 s 4 0 s 12 0 s Ma...

Page 277: ...Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 6 Flash Recall Terminate PC Programming Manual 277 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port ...

Page 278: ...3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the channel out of service This enables a temporary non use of the channel for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 26 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Feature Guide References None 278 ...

Page 279: ...I DID or TIE line before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 32 n n 1 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None An...

Page 280: ...DA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DTMF Tone DTMF Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 64 16 n n 0 11 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 on...

Page 281: ...pe Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area Value Range Normal Sweden New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the pulse inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to h...

Page 282: ...er has been dialled Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Maximum BREAK Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial Value Range 8 n n 9 20 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX ...

Page 283: ...sh signals Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Minimum BREAK Width Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal Value Range 8 n n 3 63 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDA100 KX ...

Page 284: ...nces None Feature Guide References None Line Signal Setting E M P Pulse Length Seizure Selects the length of a seizure pulse Value Range 150 ms 600 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Line Signal Setting E M P Pulse Length Answer Selects the length of an answer pulse ...

Page 285: ... Card Property EM type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Line Signal Setting E M P Pulse Length E M P Seizure ACK Enables the PBX to wait for an E M P seizure ACK signal Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Gu...

Page 286: ...ller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID Information End Code Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Card Proper...

Page 287: ...nd of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 27 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID PC Programming Manual 287 3 27 1 1 Slot Card Property EM type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only ...

Page 288: ...rty EM Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 28 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CH Indicates the channel number reference only Valu...

Page 289: ...ommunicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 3 28 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References 3 29 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Connection Command KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Feature Guide References None Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the channel Value Range Public Use the DIL method to distribute incoming tr...

Page 290: ...0 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 4 Dial Type Selection Gain Adjustment Indicates the value for hardware adjustment fixed reference only Value Range 1 Maintenance Console Location 3 28 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF ton...

Page 291: ...ly Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 4 Dial Type Selection Wink Signal Time Out Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk If a wink signal is not received before this timer expires the trunk is released Value Range 64 n n 1 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 28 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200...

Page 292: ...E Line Type Selects the type of the voice path for an E M line Value Range 2 wires 4 wires Maintenance Console Location 3 28 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Sending Caller ID to TIE Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when Trunk Property on this screen is set to Private Value Range No Yes...

Page 293: ...ne Send Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 28 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Dial Tone to Extension Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an exte...

Page 294: ...ual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 1 5 4 9 Special Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal Value Range None 16 n n 1 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 28 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References ...

Page 295: ... Range 0 5 s 1 5 s 2 0 s 4 0 s 12 0 s Maintenance Console Location 3 28 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 6 Flash Recall Terminate PC Programming Manual 295 3 28 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only ...

Page 296: ...t KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the channel out of service This enables a temporary non use of the channel for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 29 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port Connection Command KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References 3 28 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Por...

Page 297: ... DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DTMF Tone DTMF Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 64 16 n n 0 11 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Ref...

Page 298: ...Slot Card Property DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Inter digit Pause Specifies the length of the pulse inter digit pause This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly Value Range 630 ms 830 ms 1030 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type Programming Manual Referenc...

Page 299: ...erences None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Maximum BREAK Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial Value Range 8 n n 9 20 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial Pulse Minimum MAKE Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dia...

Page 300: ...e References None Caller ID Caller ID Start Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID Information End Code Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID seri...

Page 301: ...8 1 Caller ID Caller ID Caller ID End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series Value Range A D Maintenance Console Location 3 30 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID PC Programming Manual 301 3 30 1 1 Slot Card Property DID type ...

Page 302: ...Location 3 31 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 31 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number 302 PC Programmi...

Page 303: ...e Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 3 31 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Programming Manual References 3 32 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Dialling Mode Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the DID line Value Range DTMF Pulse Ma...

Page 304: ...which pulse dials are sent to the line Value Range 10 pulse s 20 pulse s Maintenance Console Location 3 31 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 4 Dial Type Selection Wink Signal Time Out Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk If a wink signal is not received before this timer expire...

Page 305: ... DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CPC Detection Time Out DID In DID Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line When None is selected here the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected Value Range None 80 n n 2 75 ms Maintenance Console Locati...

Page 306: ... is received from an analogue trunk Value Range No Yes Maintenance Console Location 3 31 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Send Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 31 1 1 Slot Port Pro...

Page 307: ...rences None Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause Value Range 1 5 s 2 5 s 3 5 s 4 5 s Maintenance Console Location 3 31 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 1 5 4 9 Special Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flas...

Page 308: ...ct Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected during which the PBX cannot seize the line Value Range 0 5 s 1 5 s 2 0 s 4 0 s 12 0 s Maintenance Console Location 3 31 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 6 Flash Recall Terminate 308 PC Programming Manual 3 31 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port ...

Page 309: ...3 31 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 32 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 31 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Feature Guide References None PC Prog...

Page 310: ...rences 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Extension Inter digit 4 17 2 9 System Options Option 2 ISDN en Bloc Dial as End of Dial for en Bloc mode 5 4 3 1 4 Dialling Plan Feature Guide References 1 30 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network QSIG CT Enables a call to be transferred to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console...

Page 311: ...network Value Range 10000 65535 Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI CTI Port Number KX TDA30 only Specifies the default CTI port number of the IP network Value Range 10000 65535 Maintenance Console Location 3 33 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Gateway Programming Manual R...

Page 312: ...Feature Guide References 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI 312 PC Programming Manual 3 33 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Gateway ...

Page 313: ...ntenance Console Location 3 34 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 34 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port nu...

Page 314: ... the desired cell in the column Select the desired cell in the column and then click Command Value Range INS The port is in service OUS The port is out of service Fault The port is not communicating with the network Maintenance Console Location 3 34 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port Programming Manual References 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port Connection Command Feature Guide References Non...

Page 315: ... 34 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 35 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port Connection Command Programming Manual References 3 34 1 1 Slot Port Property IP GW Port Feature Guide References None PC...

Page 316: ... Telephone IP PT Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask of the card Value Range 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 3 36 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Gateway Address Common Settings Displays the default gateway address of the network for IP PTs...

Page 317: ...unreachable and sets the port status to Fault During operation set between 10 s and 60 s Settings over 60 s and Disable are used for debugging purposes and IP PTs cannot be guaranteed to function normally in these circumstances Do not use debugging settings unless instructed to do so Value Range Disable 10 120 s Maintenance Console Location 3 36 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension Programming Manu...

Page 318: ...1 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT DSP Digital Gain Up Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 36 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain Value Range 14 6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3 36 1 1 Slot...

Page 319: ...near Processor is used to control echo sound quality Value Range Use Non Linear Processor Use Fixed TX Gain Maintenance Console Location 3 36 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT PC Programming Manual 319 3 36 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension ...

Page 320: ...rver Specifies the UDP port used by the IP EXT card to transmit and receive RTP Realtime Transfer Protocol data This must be changed if another network application is using the same port For voice communications an IP EXT16 card uses 64 and an IP EXT4 card uses 16 contiguous UDP ports starting from the port number specified here Value Range 1024 65472 Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Car...

Page 321: ...from the port number specified here Value Range 1024 65472 Maintenance Console Location 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension Common Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT PC Programming Manual 321 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension Common Settings ...

Page 322: ...creen will appear with information on the current IP PT extension number and index number for programming 4 Programme the relevant IP PT 5 Click Next If the registration is still in process the dialogue box will show Waiting for IP PT to register Click OK If the registration is successful the dialogue box will show Registration Succeed If there are more IP PTs to be registered click Continue to re...

Page 323: ...uccessful the dialogue box will show Forced De registration Succeed 5 Click Close Once the IP PT is successfully de registered the status of the IP PT will update to show None Shelf KX TDA600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

Page 324: ...t the extension port is not in use If the extension number is changed while the port is in use the new extension number will not come into effect Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Connection Indicates the port status r...

Page 325: ...certain IP PT is registered reference only Value Range None Registered Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT IP Address Indicates the IP address of the IP PT reference only Value Range 1 0 0 0 223 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property...

Page 326: ...ging Tone Selects the dual tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls Value Range A 64 ms 697 Hz 64 ms 852 Hz B 32 ms 697 Hz 32 ms 852 Hz C 128 ms 697 Hz 128 ms 852 Hz D 32 ms 697 Hz 96 ms 852 Hz Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT IP Codec Specif...

Page 327: ... data during a conversation The smaller this number the higher the quality of the transmitted sound When IP Codec on this screen is set to G 711 only 20 ms and 30 ms are available Value Range 20 ms 30 ms 40 ms 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 38 1 1 Slot Port Property IP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT PC Programm...

Page 328: ...P Gateway KX TDA30 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 39 1 1 Slot Card Property SIP Gateway KX TDA30 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 328 P...

Page 329: ...References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 40 1 1 Slot SIP GW Port Property KX TDA30 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desir...

Page 330: ...ange Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 3 39 1 1 Slot Card Property SIP Gateway KX TDA30 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CLIR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party s telephone when making a public network trunk call Value Range Yes No Maintenance Console Location 3 39 1 1 Slot Card Proper...

Page 331: ...Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 331 3 40 1 1 Slot SIP GW Port Property KX TDA30 only ...

Page 332: ... Card Property KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Sub slot Indicates the sub slot number reference on...

Page 333: ...xternal Input Output Card ESVM2 2 Channel Simplified Voice Message Card ESVM4 4 Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Installation Manual References For KX TDA100 KX TDA200 1 3 1 Optional Equipment For KX TDA600 1 3 1 Optional Equipment Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None S...

Page 334: ...X TDA600 only Feature Guide References None Port Number Indicates the port number of the mounted option card reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Status Indicates the port status of the mounted option card reference only Value Rang...

Page 335: ...the minimum duration of continuous input from the triggered sensor before the PBX recognises the input and makes a sensor call Value Range 32 n n 2 255 ms Maintenance Console Location 3 41 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 9 External Sensor Input Signal Detection Reopening Time Specifies the length of tim...

Page 336: ...ation 3 41 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM MSG Feature Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card as an MSG card It is possible to use the ESVM card as an SVM card MSG card OGM feature or both Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance C...

Page 337: ...Feature Guide References 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM PC Programming Manual 337 3 41 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only ...

Page 338: ...nly Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the card out of service Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 42 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Card Command KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pre INS Assigns the card type to a certain sub slot Pre installation Value Range MSG4 4 Channel...

Page 339: ...ly Installation Manual References For KX TDA100 KX TDA200 1 3 1 Optional Equipment For KX TDA600 1 3 1 Optional Equipment Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Delete Assigns the card type to be deleted from the sub slot Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 42 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property Card Command KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Man...

Page 340: ...Message Card ESVM4 4 Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot OPB3 Option Card Setup KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Installation Manual References For KX TDA100 KX TDA200 1 3 1 Optional Equipment For KX TDA600 1 3 1 Optional Equipment Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot 3 41 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Feature Gu...

Page 341: ...ECHO16 16 Channel Echo Canceller Card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only EIO4 4 Port External Input Output Card ESVM2 2 Channel Simplified Voice Message Card ESVM4 4 Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 3 43 1 1 Slot OPB3 Option Card Setup KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot 3 41 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600...

Page 342: ...A200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask of the PBX Value Range 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 and 255 255 255 255 Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Card Property CTILINK KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Reference...

Page 343: ...d Property CTILINK KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI CTI Port Number Specifies a port number used to operate CTI via LAN Value Range 10000 65535 Maintenance Console Location 3 44 1 1 Slot Card Property CTILINK KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References 4 17 2 9 System Option...

Page 344: ...e References None Port Number Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3 45 1 1 Slot Card Property DPH type KX TDA30 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Status Indicates the port status reference only This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command Click the desired cell in the col...

Page 345: ...put ports only Value Range Relay Ringer Door Opener DPH4 only Maintenance Console Location 3 45 1 1 Slot Card Property DPH type KX TDA30 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 2 Door Open 1 17 10 External Relay Control For Sensor EIO Input Signal Decision Time Specifies the minimum duration of continuous input from the triggered sensor before the PBX recognises the i...

Page 346: ... after the sensor has been triggered during which any further input from the sensor will be ignored Value Range 10 n n 1 255 s Maintenance Console Location 3 45 1 1 Slot Card Property DPH type KX TDA30 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 9 External Sensor 346 PC Programming Manual 3 45 1 1 Slot Card Property DPH type KX TDA30 only ...

Page 347: ...Card Property DPH type KX TDA30 only Feature Guide References None OUS Takes the port out of service This enables a temporary non use of the port for example for the purpose of repair Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 46 1 1 Slot Card Property DPH type Connection Command KX TDA30 only Programming Manual References 3 45 1 1 Slot Card Property DPH type KX TDA30 only Feature G...

Page 348: ... card as an SVM card It is possible to use the ESVM card as an SVM card MSG card OGM feature or both Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 3 47 1 1 Slot Card Property ESVM Type KX TDA30 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM MSG Feature Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card ...

Page 349: ...47 1 1 Slot Card Property ESVM Type KX TDA30 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM PC Programming Manual 349 3 47 1 1 Slot Card Property ESVM Type KX TDA30 only ...

Page 350: ... the PBX Registering 2 4 GHz PS 2 8 7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX Registering DECT 6 0 PS 2 9 7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX KX TDA100 KX TDA200 Registering DECT PS 2 8 7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX Registering 2 4 GHz PS 2 9 7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX Registering DECT 6 0 PS 2 10 7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX KX TDA600 Registering DECT PS 2 10 7 Conn...

Page 351: ...n is successful the dialogue box will show Forced De registration Succeed 5 Click Close Once the PS is successfully de registered the status of the PS will update to show None Personal Identification Number Specifies the Personal Identification Number PIN of the PBX used to avoid registering a PS to the wrong PBX Note that the same PIN should be entered at the PS before the PS is registered to the...

Page 352: ...tension No Specifies the extension number of the PS In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode the PS can be used as a sub telephone with a wired main telephone PT SLT and two of them will share one extension number of the main telephone However note that the PS extension number specified here will not be altered by the extension number of the main telephone even if the PS is in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Valu...

Page 353: ...al References 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main Extension Name Feature Guide References 1 25 1 Portable Station PS Connection Status Indicates whether a certain PS is registered reference only Value Range None Registered Maintenance Console Location 3 48 1 2 Portable Station Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 25 1 Portable Station PS Connection PC Progr...

Page 354: ... be assigned automatically when a CS is connected to the PBX Without the Radio System ID PSs cannot be registered System Wireless System ID Indicates the radio system ID used to register a PS reference only Value Range Not applicable Maintenance Console Location 3 49 1 3 Option Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None New Card Installation Card Status for any Card Selects t...

Page 355: ...he first time Value Range ISDN Standard mode The CCBS CF CT and Centralised VM features are supported DIL and DID call distribution are available for the D channel T1 LCOT mode DIL and DID call distribution are available for all 23B channels The CCBS CF CT and Centralised VM features are not available in this mode Maintenance Console Location 3 49 1 3 Option Programming Manual References None Feat...

Page 356: ... present clock source card to OUS then INS Note If multiple PBXs are used to establish a private network TIE line service QSIG network etc without being connected through the telephone company assign only one PBX as the clock source on the network That PBX should have a card connected to a telephone company line selected as its clock source All other PBXs should have cards connected to the network...

Page 357: ...Section 4 2 System PC Programming Manual 357 ...

Page 358: ...2 1 Date Time Daylight Saving Date Time Setting Setting Enables Summer time Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 1 2 1 Date Time Daylight Saving Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 5 Automatic Setup Start Date Year Month Day Specifies the start date of daylight savings time Value Range Year 2000 2099 Month 1 12 Day 1 31 Maintenance Console Location ...

Page 359: ...vings time Value Range Year 2000 2099 Month 1 12 Day 1 31 Maintenance Console Location 4 1 2 1 Date Time Daylight Saving Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 5 Automatic Setup PC Programming Manual 359 4 1 2 1 Date Time Daylight Saving ...

Page 360: ...e parameter you want to change and typing the new value or by clicking the up down arrows beside the date and time Value Range Year 2000 2099 Month 01 12 Day 01 31 Hour 00 23 Minute 00 59 Second 00 59 Maintenance Console Location 4 2 2 1 Date Time Daylight Saving Date Time Setting Programming Manual References 4 1 2 1 Date Time Daylight Saving Feature Guide References None 360 PC Programming Manua...

Page 361: ...ing of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 4 3 2 2 Operator BGM Programming Manual References 4 5 2 4 Week Table 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 2 2 5 Operator Features BGM and Music on Hold Music Source of BGM2 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Selects the audio source of BGM2 Value Range External BGM Port 2 Internal ...

Page 362: ...audio source for Music on Hold Value Range For KX TDA30 Tone BGM For KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 Tone BGM 1 External BGM Port 1 BGM 2 Internal 1 2 or External 2 Maintenance Console Location 4 3 2 2 Operator BGM Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 13 4 Music on Hold BGM and Music on Hold Sound on Transfer Selects the audio source for Music for Transfer either the same mu...

Page 363: ...Maintenance Console Location 4 3 2 2 Operator BGM Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 12 1 Call Transfer PC Programming Manual 363 4 3 2 2 Operator BGM ...

Page 364: ...tic Redial Repeat Interval Specifies the length of time between repeated Automatic Redial attempts Value Range 10 n n 1 360 s Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Automatic Redial Redial Call Ring Duration Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the called party to answer an Automatic...

Page 365: ...ogue trunk is performed Value Range 0 15 s Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Dial Hot Line Pickup Dial Start Specifies the length of time between going off hook and the start of automatic dialling when the Hot Line feature is set Value Range 0 15 s Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers C...

Page 366: ...nt digits must be dialled before the PBX sends a reorder tone Value Range 1 15 s Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 2 Automatic Extension Release Dial Analogue CO First Digit Specifies the length of time within which the first digit of a telephone number must be sent to an analogue trunk If no digit is sent before th...

Page 367: ...nalogue trunk Value Range 1 15 s Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Dial Analogue CO Call Duration Start Specifies the length of time between the end of dialling and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing analogue trunk calls Value Range 0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manua...

Page 368: ... Answer Time Day Lunch Break Night Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing Recall Hold Recall Specifies the length of time until the holding extension receives a Hold Recall ring or alarm tone when a held call remains unretrieved Value Range 0 disable the Hold Recall 240 s Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 ...

Page 369: ...k Recall ring Value Range 1 240 s Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 13 2 Call Park Recall Disconnect after Recall Specifies the length of time after an extension with a trunk call on hold receives a Hold Recall tone that the held ca...

Page 370: ...r Tone for PT Handset Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard when using a PT handset The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires Value Range 1 15 s Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 2 Automatic Extension Release Tone Length Reorder Tone for PT Hands free Specifies the length of time ...

Page 371: ...e References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Mute OGM Start Timer after answering Specifies the length of time until the caller hears an OGM after reaching the DISA line Value Range 0 0 12 0 s Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA No D...

Page 372: ...SA AA Service activates Value Range 0 5 s Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Intercept Timer Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the length of time until an unanswered DISA call is intercepted and redirected to the intercept routing destination afte...

Page 373: ...all rings at the intercept routing destination before being disconnected Value Range 0 60 s Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA CO to CO Call Prolong Counter Specifies the number of times that the caller can prolong a trunk to trunk call on a DIS...

Page 374: ...m Access DISA DISA Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message Specifies the length of time that a progress tone is sent to the manager extension before recording an OGM Value Range 0 7 s Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Feature Guide References 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM DISA Reorder Tone Duration...

Page 375: ... Programming Manual References 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call Doorphone Call Duration Specifies the length of time until an answered doorphone call is disconnected Value Range 10 n n 0 30 s Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call Doorphone Open Duration Spec...

Page 376: ...ge 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 4 Timed Reminder Timed Reminder Interval Time Specifies the length of time between the repeated alarms Value Range 10 n n 1 120 s Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 4 Timed Reminder 376 PC Pr...

Page 377: ...d Conference Recall tone Value Range 0 60 min Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 14 1 2 Conference Unattended Conference Warning Tone Start Timer Specifies the length of time until the parties involved in an Unattended Conference receive a warning tone after the conference originator receives the Unattended Conference ...

Page 378: ...ces None Feature Guide References 1 14 1 2 Conference Miscellaneous Caller ID Waiting to receive Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive Caller ID from an analogue trunk If the Caller ID is received through an analogue trunk card on which no Caller ID card is mounted or through a port to which Caller ID Detection is disabled this timer is not applicable Value Range 0 15 s Mainte...

Page 379: ...ler ID Extension PIN Lock Counter Specifies the number of successive incorrect PIN entries allowed before the extension PIN is locked A locked extension PIN can not be used until reset from the extension assigned as manager Specifying None disables this counter Value Range None 1 15 Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9...

Page 380: ...ocation 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Incoming Call Inter digit Timer TIE Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a dialled number from a TIE line The call will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires Value Range 3 30 s Maintenance Co...

Page 381: ...nk for example to transfer a call until the VPS goes on hook If the time specified here is too short the VPS will be unable to dial the number and make a connection Value Range 1 30 s Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 Voice Mail Features During Conversation DTMF Signal Length Specifies the length of time that a DTM...

Page 382: ...versation Pause Signal Time Specifies the length of the pause inserted when the PAUSE button is pressed during a conversation Value Range 1 5 s 2 5 s 3 5 s 4 5 s Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion System Wireless PS Out of Range Timer When the destination of an incoming call is a PS specifies the ...

Page 383: ...Manual References 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Message Feature Guide References 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM SVM Dial Tone Continuous Time Specifies the length of time that dial tone 3 is heard after all messages stored by the SVM feature for an extension are finished playing Value Range 1 60 s Maintenance Console L...

Page 384: ... If no members answer the call before this timer expires the call is cancelled Value Range 0 120 s Maintenance Console Location 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Programming Manual References 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Broadcasting Operation 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Miscellaneous Broadcasting Operation 5 27 3 10 Broadcasting Group Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Broadcasting 384 ...

Page 385: ...ime Table 1 Select the desired Time Table from the Time Table No list When in Automatic Switching mode the time modes of the tenant are switched as programmed in the corresponding Time Table Manual switching is possible only from an authorised extension determined by COS To adjust the currently displayed Time Table click and drag the divisions between two time periods To programme the time blocks ...

Page 386: ...rences None Feature Guide References 2 2 3 Tenant Service 2 2 4 Time Service 1 Day Lunch Night Day1 Start Lunch Start Day2 Start Night Start Hour Minute Specifies the start time for each time block Times can only be set when 1 Day Lunch Night Day1 Start Lunch Start Day2 Start Night Start Setting is set to Enable Value Range 00 00 23 59 Maintenance Console Location 4 6 2 4 Week Table Time Setting P...

Page 387: ...3 Start Setting is set to Enable Value Range 00 00 23 59 Maintenance Console Location 4 6 2 4 Week Table Time Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 3 Tenant Service 2 2 4 Time Service 2 Break Break 1 3 End Hour Minute Specifies the end time for each break period Times can only be set when 2 Break Break 1 3 Start Setting is set to Enable Value Range 00 00 23 59 Mai...

Page 388: ...Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 3 Tenant Service 2 2 4 Time Service 388 PC Programming Manual 4 6 2 4 Week Table Time Setting ...

Page 389: ... Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 7 2 5 Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Holiday Table Start Date Month Specifies the month of the holiday start date Value Range 1 12 Maintenance Console Location 4 7 2 5 Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Holiday Table Start Date...

Page 390: ...ue Range 1 12 Maintenance Console Location 4 7 2 5 Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Holiday Table End Date Day Specifies the day of the holiday end date Value Range 1 31 Maintenance Console Location 4 7 2 5 Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service 390 PC Programming Manual 4 7 2 5 Holida...

Page 391: ...umbers and floating extension numbers Value Range Max 3 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings 7...

Page 392: ... Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 3 2 2 Operator BGM 8 6 6 6 Tenant Feature Guide References 2 2 5 Operator Features Idle Line Access Local Access Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call by Idle Line Access selects an idle trunk automatically Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manua...

Page 393: ...pecifies the feature number used to make a TIE line call Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Redial Specifies the feature number used to redial the last number dialled Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Conso...

Page 394: ... Dial Feature Guide References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System Personal Speed Dialling Programming Specifies the feature number used to programme Personal Speed Dialling numbers at an extension Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal S...

Page 395: ...ramming Manual References 5 10 3 4 Paging Group Feature Guide References 1 15 1 Paging External BGM On Off Specifies the feature number available for manager extensions used to turn on or off the external BGM Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 3 2 2 Operator BGM 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Se...

Page 396: ...le CO Line Access Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using a certain trunk Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access Parallel Telephone Ring Mode Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel an SL...

Page 397: ...l Pickup Directed Call Pickup Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain extension Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Call Pickup Deny 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Call Pickup Deny Feature ...

Page 398: ...paging group Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 5 10 3 4 Paging Group Feature Guide References 1 15 1 Paging Automatic Callback Busy Cancel Specifies the feature number used to cancel Automatic Callback Busy Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbe...

Page 399: ...Remote Operation by Other Extension Feature Guide References 1 9 5 Walking COS 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Wireless XDP Parallel mode Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Setting...

Page 400: ...le Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 13 1 Call Hold Call Hold Retrieve Specified with a Holding Extension Number Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held call from a different extension by specifying a holding extension number Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numberin...

Page 401: ...a Held CO Line Number Specifies the feature number used to retrieve a held trunk call from a different extension by specifying the held trunk number Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 13 1 Call Hold Door Open Specifies the feature number used to open a door Value Ran...

Page 402: ...nces 1 17 10 External Relay Control External Feature Access Specifies the feature number used to access the features of a host PBX or the telephone company Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 7 External Feature Access EFA ISDN Hold Specifies the feature number used...

Page 403: ...ervice COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 1 30 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentatio...

Page 404: ...k in use subscriber s number or the extension to the network Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port ISDN CO Subscriber Number 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only CO Setting Subscriber Number 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Set...

Page 405: ... 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 4 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP 1 21 1 5 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P Message Waiting Set Cancel Call Back Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Message Waiting or call back the caller Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan...

Page 406: ... of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND FWD DND Set Cancel Call from Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD DND for incoming intercom calls Value Range Max 4 digits consisti...

Page 407: ...feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming trunk and intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 1 Ca...

Page 408: ... Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY Call Pickup Deny Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Call Pickup Deny i e preventing other ex...

Page 409: ...mber used to use the same extension settings at a new extension Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 3 Walking Extension Data Line Security Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Data Line Security i e preventing signals from other extensions ...

Page 410: ... 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting Automatic Call Waiting Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Call Waiting notification from a trunk doorphone or a call via an incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting Executive Overri...

Page 411: ...sed to enter or leave Not Ready mode Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Log in Log out Specifies the feature number used to join or leave an incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 4 ...

Page 412: ...mber Feature Guide References 1 2 2 8 Supervisory Feature Hot Line Pickup Dial Program Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set cancel the Hot Line feature or programme the number to be automatically dialled Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone...

Page 413: ...Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 3 2 2 Operator BGM Feature Guide References 1 17 4 Background Music BGM Remote Timed Reminder Remote Wakeup Call Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder remotely Wake up Call Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming ...

Page 414: ...s consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Main SMDR for External Hotel Application 2 Printing Message 1 8 Feature Guide References 1 26 2 Printing Message Extension Dial Lock Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to lock or unlock an extension to make certain trunk calls and change the forwarding des...

Page 415: ...ng Manager Manager Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Remote Extension Dial Lock Off Specifies the feature number available for manager extensions used to unlock other extensions using the Extension Dial Lock feature Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settin...

Page 416: ...n features of an extension to the default values Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 2 Extension Feature Clear Extension PIN Set Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set a PIN for an extension Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Consol...

Page 417: ...ies the feature number used to make a broadcasting call Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Miscellaneous Broadcasting Ring Duration 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Miscellaneous Broadcasting Operation 5 27 3 10 Broadcasting Group Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Broa...

Page 418: ...es 4 17 2 9 System Options Option 5 Busy Out Busy Out for Analogue CO Feature Guide References 1 5 4 6 Trunk Busy Out Simplified Voice Message Access Specifies the feature number used to access the SVM feature to record listen to and delete messages Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 6 9 4 1 7 Wire...

Page 419: ...ing Number Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service KX T7710 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only The settings of the MESSAGE button and One touch buttons on the KX T7710 can be programmed Dial Indicates the DTMF tone dial required by the PBX to recognise it and dial the preprogrammed number for each button reference only Value Range B For MESSAGE button A1 For One touch button 1 A2 For One ...

Page 420: ...tenance Console Location 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Programming Manual References 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Message Waiting Set Cancel Call Back Feature Guide References 1 6 1 3 KX T7710 One touch Dialling One touch Dial 01 08 Phone Number Specifies the number dialled when a one touch button on the KX T7710 is pressed This is available only when the position of the Mode switch leve...

Page 421: ...ide Use quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does not work Specifies whether to check if the quick dial numbering plan is compatible does not overlap with the main numbering plan Value Range Disable Checks whether the quick dial numbering plan is compatible with the main numbering plan Enable Does not check whether the quick dial numbering plan is compatible with the main numbering ...

Page 422: ...Quick Dialling number is used Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 4 9 2 6 2 Numbering Plan Quick Dial Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 6 Quick Dialling 1 30 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering 422 PC Programming Manual 4 9 2 6 2 Numbering Plan...

Page 423: ...Waiting for Extension Call 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 2 Manual C Waiting for Extension Call Feature Guide References 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND 1 8 4 2 Call Waiting Tone 1 8 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA Executive Busy Override Specifies the feature number used to interrupt an existing call to establish a three party confer...

Page 424: ...Message Waiting Set Specifies the feature number used to leave a Message Waiting notification Value Range 1 digit 0 9 or Maintenance Console Location 4 10 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 1 Message Waiting Call Monitor Specifies the feature number used to listen to a busy extension s conversation Value Range 1 digit 0 9 or ...

Page 425: ...A Whisper OHCA DND Override 2 Specifies the feature number used to notify a busy extension of a second call by Call Waiting or call an extension in DND mode This is the same setting as BSS OHCA Whisper OHCA DND Override on this screen and can be used to provide two methods of activating the specified features This can be useful for example if users prefer to use a separate feature number to activa...

Page 426: ...1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND 1 8 4 2 Call Waiting Tone 1 8 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA 426 PC Programming Manual 4 10 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature ...

Page 427: ...f Service COS TRS Level Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring level for making trunk calls in each time mode Value Range 1 Allows all trunk calls 2 6 Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables 7 Restricts all trunk calls Maintenance Console Location 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual Re...

Page 428: ...Code Feature Guide References 1 9 3 Extension Dial Lock TRS Level for System Speed Dialling Specifies the TRS Barring level for making a trunk call using System Speed Dialling numbers which overrides the TRS Barring set for the current time mode Value Range 1 Allows all trunk calls 2 6 Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables 7 Restricts all trunk ...

Page 429: ...on CO Duration Time on 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 4 17 2 9 System Options Option 2 Extension CO Call Limitation For Incoming Call 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Main COS 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension...

Page 430: ...1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Account Code Mode Specifies whether the entry of an account code is optional or mandatory when making a trunk call Value Range Option Forced Maintenance Console Location...

Page 431: ... CF by ISDN P P Outgoing CO Call Printout SMDR Enables the automatic recording of information about outgoing trunk calls on SMDR Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS 13 1 11 1 Main Feature Guide Refer...

Page 432: ...nge Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 1 8 2 Executive Busy Override DND Override Enables making a call to an extension in DND mode by entering the feature number Value Range Disable En...

Page 433: ...gramming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 1 8 4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 1 8 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA Call Monitor Enables listening to a busy extension s conversation Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 11 2...

Page 434: ...ttings Main COS 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Programming Manager COS Name Specifies the name of the COS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Executive Busy Override Deny...

Page 435: ...e Location 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 5 14 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Programming Mode Level Specifies the level of authorisation for performing PT progra...

Page 436: ...s manual switching of time modes Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 4 5 2 4 Week Table 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service PDN SDN KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only An SDN button allows a P...

Page 437: ...d Maintenance Console Location 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Making call by COS of SDN key s owner Selects whether an extension that uses an SDN button to make calls is given the COS of the SDN button s registered owner extension This setting is only av...

Page 438: ...aintenance Console Location 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Optional Device Other Extensions COS Name Specifies the name of the COS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual Refe...

Page 439: ...ce Console Location 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 7 6 5 4 External Relay Feature Guide References 1 17 10 External Relay Control Accept the Call from DISA Enables reception of calls from DISA Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Sett...

Page 440: ... COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 1 9 5 Walking COS Accept Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set by PS Allows Wireless XDP Parallel Mode to be set by a PS Value Range Allow Deny Maintenance Console Location 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide Reference...

Page 441: ...mming Manual References 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Miscellaneous Broadcasting Ring Duration 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Broadcasting Operation 5 27 3 10 Broadcasting Group Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Broadcasting Accept a collect call for Brazil Enables accepting collect calls Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming M...

Page 442: ...X TDA200 or 1 96 KX TDA600 Specifies the available trunk groups Value Range Block blue Non Block Maintenance Console Location 4 12 2 7 2 Class of Service External Call Block Programming Manual References 4 5 2 4 Week Table 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access 442 PC Progr...

Page 443: ...ther Extension 1 64 Specifies the combinations of COS levels for which intercom calls are blocked Value Range Block blue Non Block Maintenance Console Location 4 13 2 7 3 Class of Service Internal Call Block Programming Manual References 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Main COS 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Se...

Page 444: ...fies the ring tone pattern for incoming trunk calls Value Range Single Double Triple Option1 Option2 Maintenance Console Location 4 14 2 8 1 Ring Tone Patterns Call from CO Programming Manual References 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Trunk Group Number 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table Fea...

Page 445: ...the ring tone pattern for incoming doorphone calls Value Range Single Double Triple S Double Option 1 Option 2 Maintenance Console Location 4 15 2 8 2 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Doorphone Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Feature Guide ...

Page 446: ...all from Others Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table Feature Guide References None Timed Reminder Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 Specifies the ring tone pattern for Timed Reminder alarms Value Range Single Double Triple Option 1 Option 2 Maintenance Console Locat...

Page 447: ...8 3 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Others Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Ring Pattern Table Feature Guide References None External Sensor Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1 8 Specifies the ring tone pattern for calls from an external sensor Value Range Single Double Triple Option 1 O...

Page 448: ...Feature Guide References None 448 PC Programming Manual 4 16 2 8 3 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Others ...

Page 449: ...splay Selects the time format shown on the displays of extensions The time display format assigned here applies when setting the Timed Reminder feature Value Range 12H 24H Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 4 Timed Reminder PT LCD Password PIN Display Selects whether passwords and PINs Personal Identification Number...

Page 450: ... Options Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 20 3 LED Indication PT Fwd DND DND LED Selects the light pattern of the FWD DND button while the DND feature is activated Value Range On Solid Red on Flash Slow red flashing Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 ...

Page 451: ...ng When there are separate FWD DND settings for calls from trunks and calls from extensions mode switching cannot be performed Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features PT Fwd DND Paging to DND Extension Specifie...

Page 452: ...mming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 2 Off hook Monitor PT Operation Privacy Release by SCO key Selects the function of the S CO button during a trunk call Value Range Enable Pressing the S CO button activates the Privacy Release feature Disable Pressing the S CO button switches the information shown on the PT display Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Progr...

Page 453: ...ation Automatic Answer for Call from CO after Specifies the number of times a PT in Hands free Answerback mode will ring before a conversation is established automatically when it receives a call from a trunk Value Range No Ring 1 Ring 2 Rings 3 Rings Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback PT Op...

Page 454: ...all Transfer without Announcement feature Value Range Hold Any extension can retrieve a held call Exclusive Hold Only the holding extension can retrieve a held call Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 13 1 Call Hold Option 2 Extension Clear Call Waiting Specifies whether the Call Waiting setting is cleared when Extensio...

Page 455: ... References None Feature Guide References 1 28 2 Extension Feature Clear Extension Clear Hot Line Pickup Dial Specifies whether the Hot Line setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed Value Range Clear Do not clear Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 2 Extension Feature Clear CODEC System CODEC Sele...

Page 456: ...c mode Specifies whether to automatically send as an end code when dialling to an ISDN line if used as the end code will not be dialled out as part of a number even when the key is pressed Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port ISDN CO ISDN Outgoing Call Type 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI ...

Page 457: ...nalogue CO line is performed when the called party does not answer within a preprogrammed time period Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Automatic Redial Redial Call Ring Duration Feature Guide References 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Redial Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory Specifies whether ...

Page 458: ...ing Call Selects whether the time limit for extension to trunk calls applies to outgoing calls only or for both outgoing and incoming calls COS determines the use of this feature and the length of the time limit can be assigned on a trunk group basis Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Setting...

Page 459: ... Voice Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 1 Confirmation Tone 1 is heard from a PT when it receives a call in voice calling mode Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call 1 29 2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone Tone 2 Paged Automatic Answer Enables the PBX to send Confi...

Page 460: ...r from a doorphone when the doorphone button is pressed Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 29 2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone Tone 3 2 Start Talking after Answering Call Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3 2 Confirmation Tone 3 2 is heard from an extension when answering a call ...

Page 461: ...Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone Tone 4 2 Finish Conference Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4 2 Confirmation Tone 4 2 is heard from an extension when a party leaves a conference call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 14 1 2 Conference 1 29 2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone T...

Page 462: ...e Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 29 1 Dial Tone Dial Tone Dial Tone for Extension Selects the dial tone the PBX sends to extensions to inform about the features activated on them Value Range Type A Type B Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature ...

Page 463: ...X TDA600 only 10 1 8 1 System Setting Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 1 29 1 Dial Tone Echo Cancel Conference Enables the use of the ECHO EECHO card for conference calls Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 14 1 2 Conference Echo Cancel CO to CO Enables the use of ...

Page 464: ...of the ECHO EECHO card for extension to ISDN T1 E1 line calls If set to Enable the echo canceller card is used for extension to ISDN T1 E1 line calls If set to Disable the echo canceller card is not used for extension to ISDN T1 E1 line calls Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Option 4 DSS...

Page 465: ...l flash when a call arrives and pressing it will pick up the call Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup DSS Key Call Pick up by DSS key for ICD Group Call Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified incoming call distribution group To enable this setting DSS K...

Page 466: ... Feature Guide References 1 12 1 Call Transfer Transfer Transfer to busy Extension without BSS Operation Enables a transferred call to be queued when the transfer destination is busy Value Range Disable The call is not transferred If the transfer destination has enabled the call waiting notification feature it is possible to inform the destination about the call transfer Enable The transferred cal...

Page 467: ...of the extension that performed the transfer Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN when ICD Group with Cellular Phone Selects whether the CLIP number of the calling party or of the virtual PS is se...

Page 468: ...ne Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Private Network TIE Call by Extension Numbering Optional SD Card Required Enables extensions at PBXs connected in a network to have the same extension numbering scheme and make TIE line calls to each other For example extension 101 is registered at PBX 1 and extension 102 is registered at PBX 2 The user of extension 1 dials 102 and the dialled number is...

Page 469: ...mer Feature Guide References 1 30 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group System Wireless SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Selects whether call information such as Caller ID is shown on the display of a PDN extension PS i e a PS with one or more PDN buttons when a call is received while delayed ringing is set Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2...

Page 470: ...ttern KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Specifies the Message Waiting Lamp light pattern of SLTs Value Range 1 12 Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 1 Message Waiting Whisper OHCA for SLT APT KX T72xx Enables the use of Whisper OHCA to SLTs and IP PTs and DPTs other than KX T7400 series KX T7500 series KX T7600 ser...

Page 471: ...nces 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting Busy Out Busy Out for Analogue CO Enables the PBX to automatically set a trunk to Busy Out status when a loop current is not detected preventing that trunk from being used Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 6 Trunk Busy Out ISDN Voice Path Connection Connect when...

Page 472: ...all Door Open Relay On External BGM Paging Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Option Fwd from ISDN to ISDN Specifies whether alert messages are sent to the ISDN network This setting should be enabled for networks that disconnect a call if an alert message is not received Value Range Mode1 Disable Mode2 Enable M...

Page 473: ...mes that the alive check is repeated for First Party Call Control CTI When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times without success the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost Value Range 0 10 Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 32 1 Computer Telephon...

Page 474: ...4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI 3rd Party CTI System status retry counter Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number of times without success the PBX assumes that the logical connection with ...

Page 475: ...ration CTI 3rd Party CTI CDR retry counter Specifies the number of times that the alive check of CDR is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number times the association is released automatically Value Range 0 10 Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 32 1 Compute...

Page 476: ...ia USB to one PC for example for CTI Value Range 1 8 Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CTI Make Call SLT Ring Specifies whether to ring an SLT when a call is made from CTI instead of the SLT Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 17 2 9 System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Gu...

Page 477: ... slot number Slot nn SLC8 5 8 Ports 5 to 8 of the SLC8 card nn slot number Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 10 Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 8 Extension Caller ID Sending Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Extension Caller ID Modulation Type Specifies the modulation frequency to be used when sending Caller ID info...

Page 478: ...ntenance Console Location 4 18 2 10 Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Channel Seizure Wait Time Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to send the seizure signal following the first ring when sending Caller ID information to an SLT Value Range 64 n n 5 35 ms Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 10 Extension C...

Page 479: ...cess Code to Extension Caller ID Enables the PBX to automatically add a Trunk Access number to the received telephone number when sending the Caller ID number of an incoming trunk call to an SLT Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 10 Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Send Caller ID Date Time to Extension E...

Page 480: ...cation 4 18 2 10 Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Send Caller ID Long Distance to Extension Enables the PBX to send a call qualifier Long Distance if received from the trunk when sending Caller ID information to an SLT Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 10 Extension CID Settings Programming Manual Refere...

Page 481: ...gnal modulation Value Range 14 dB 12 dB 10 dB 8 dB 6 dB 4 dB 2 dB 0 dB Maintenance Console Location 4 18 2 10 Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID PC Programming Manual 481 4 18 2 10 Extension CID Settings ...

Page 482: ...rences 5 10 3 4 Paging Group Feature Guide References 1 15 1 Paging Paging EPG 2 External Pager 2 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 2 Value Range 15 15 dB Maintenance Console Location 4 19 2 11 1 Audio Gain Paging MOH Programming Manual References 5 10 3 4 Paging Group Feature Guide References 1 15 1 Paging Paging EPG External Pager KX TDA30 onl...

Page 483: ... Console Location 4 19 2 11 1 Audio Gain Paging MOH Programming Manual References 5 10 3 4 Paging Group Feature Guide References 1 15 1 Paging MOH MOH 1 Music On Hold 1 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 1 Value Range 11 11 dB Maintenance Console Location 4 19 2 11 1 Audio Gain Paging MOH Programming Manual References 4 3 2 2 Operator BGM Feature Gu...

Page 484: ...erator BGM Feature Guide References 1 13 4 Music on Hold 1 17 4 Background Music BGM MOH MOH Music On Hold KX TDA30 only Specifies the music volume for the External BGM Value Range 11 11 dB Maintenance Console Location 4 19 2 11 1 Audio Gain Paging MOH Programming Manual References 4 3 2 2 Operator BGM Feature Guide References 1 13 4 Music on Hold 1 17 4 Background Music BGM 484 PC Programming Man...

Page 485: ...e Console Location 4 20 2 11 2 Audio Gain Card Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Down Gain From PBX Specifies the volume for audio signals from the PBX to the selected type of card Value Range 15 15 dB Maintenance Console Location 4 20 2 11 2 Audio Gain Card Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 485 4 20 2 11 2 Audio G...

Page 486: ...486 PC Programming Manual 4 20 2 11 2 Audio Gain Card ...

Page 487: ...Section 5 3 Group PC Programming Manual 487 ...

Page 488: ...k Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References None COS Specifies the COS of the trunk group applied when making a call from a trunk to another trunk with TIE Line Service If you wish to prevent such calls from being made ensure that the COS specified here has a TRS level of 7 assigned for all relevant time modes in 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Servic...

Page 489: ...ccess CO CO Duration Time Specifies the length of time that a trunk to trunk call can be maintained before being disconnected Value Range None 1 60 min Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 11 8 Trunk Call Limitation Extension CO Duration Time Specifies the length of time that an extension...

Page 490: ...e 1 4 Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 5 3 3 1 3 Caller ID Modification 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Dialling Plan Table Specifies the table to be used for en bloc dialling Value Range 1 4 Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 5 4 3 1 4 Dialli...

Page 491: ...unk call by silence detection Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Tone Detection Continuous Enables the disconnection of a DISA originated trunk to trunk call by continuous signal de...

Page 492: ...m 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection Silence Enables the disconnection of an SVM originated trunk to trunk call by silence detection Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 8 Built in Sim...

Page 493: ... signal detection Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Host PBX Access Code Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Setti...

Page 494: ...ss Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX Collect Call Reject For Brazil Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References None Collect Call Reject for Brazil Mode Enables the PBX to automatic...

Page 495: ...0 ms 2000 ms Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Collect Call Reject for Brazil Flashing Time Selects the length of the flash signal that the PBX sends to reject a collect call This setting is only for users in Brazil Value Range 1000 ms 1500 ms 2000 ms 2500 ms Maintenance Console Location 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk ...

Page 496: ...the trunk group assigned to the corresponding priority level Select the blank option to not assign a trunk group to the priority Value Range For KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 Trunk Group No 1 64 For KX TDA600 Trunk Group No 1 96 Maintenance Console Location 5 2 3 1 2 Trunk Group Local Access Priority Programming Manual References 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Acc...

Page 497: ...ional call data and 1 long distance code can be programmed Each trunk group can select a table for use Select the desired table from the Modification Table list If the modified number does not contain an area code programmed here the PBX applies the Long Distance Code settings to the modified number Area Code for Local International Call Data 1 10 Specifies the leading number area code to look for...

Page 498: ...gh public networks when the type of network numbering plan is Unknown or not specified A maximum of 4 Length of Digits Modification Tables can be programmed Select the desired table from the Modification Table list If the length of digits of an incoming trunk call is less than the Minimum Caller ID Digits for National the caller s number is not modified Minimum Caller ID Digits for International S...

Page 499: ...lic Private 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Called Party number Type of Number Public Private Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID Added Number for International Specifies the number to be added to the incoming telephone number when the total number of digits exceeds Minimum Caller ID Digits for International Value Range Max 8 digits 0 9 and Maintenance...

Page 500: ... numbering plan is International National or Subscriber the caller s number can be modified as programmed in the Modification Tables assigned to the trunk group The modified number will then be recorded and it is used for sending to the network as a CLIP number A maximum of 4 CLIP Modification Tables can be programmed Select the desired table from the Modification Table list Removed Number of Digi...

Page 501: ...nd Maintenance Console Location 5 3 3 1 3 Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Calling Party number Type of Number Public Private 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Called Party number Type of Number Public Private Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Caller ID PC Programming Man...

Page 502: ...an Table list To assign a set of leading numbers automatically click Auto Assign Leading Number Specifies the leading number to be regarded as the beginning of dialling Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 N 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P 0 1 and X 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 5 4 3 1 4 Dialling Plan Programming Manual References 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Analogue CO Fir...

Page 503: ...oved digits Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 5 4 3 1 4 Dialling Plan Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY PC Programming Manual 503 5 4 3 1 4 Dialling Plan ...

Page 504: ...lling plan table Value Range Type A 1 N11 2 NXX XXXX 3 1NXX NXX XXXX 4 50 Not stored Type B 1 N11 2 NNX XXXX 3 1NPX NXX XXXX 4 50 Not stored Type C 1 N11 2 NXX XXXX 3 1NNX XXXX 4 1NPX NXX XXXX 5 50 Not stored Type D 1 47 Not stored 48 N11 49 NXX XXXX 50 1NXX NXX XXXX Type E 1 N11 2 NXX NXX XXXX 3 1NXX NXX XXXX 4 50 Not stored Maintenance Console Location 5 5 3 1 4 Dialling Plan Auto Assign Program...

Page 505: ...te Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Rate Specifies the call charge rate The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options Digits After Decimal Point in 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Value Range 0 9999999 Maintenance Console Location 5 6 3 1 5 Trunk Group Charge Rate Programming Manual References 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Feature Gu...

Page 506: ...ng Manual References 5 8 3 3 Call Pickup Group 5 10 3 4 Paging Group 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main User Group 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main User Group Feature Guide References 2 2 2 Group Tenant Number Specifies the tenant to which the extension user group belongs Value Range For KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 1 8 For KX TDA600 1 32 Maintenance Console Locat...

Page 507: ...ng Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup 2 2 2 Group Pickup Group 1st 8th Selects the call pickup groups that the extension user group belongs to One extension user group can be assigned to a maximum of 8 call pickup groups on this screen To assign an extension user group to more th...

Page 508: ...Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup 2 2 2 Group 508 PC Programming Manual 5 8 3 3 Call Pickup Group ...

Page 509: ...ension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup 2 2 2 Group User Group 1 32 KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or 1 96 KX TDA600 Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding pickup group Value Range ON blue OFF Maintenance Console Location 5 9 3 3 Call Pickup Group All Setting Programming Manual References 6...

Page 510: ...haracters Maintenance Console Location 5 10 3 4 Paging Group Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 15 1 Paging 2 2 2 Group Paging Group 1st 8th Selects the paging groups that the extension user group belongs to One extension user group can be assigned to a maximum of 8 paging groups on th...

Page 511: ...Feature Guide References 1 15 1 Paging 2 2 2 Group PC Programming Manual 511 5 10 3 4 Paging Group ...

Page 512: ...d Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 15 1 Paging 2 2 2 Group User Group 1 32 KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or 1 96 KX TDA600 Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding paging group Value Range ON blue OFF Maintenance Console Location 5 11 3 4 Paging Group All Setting Programming Manual References 6 1 4 ...

Page 513: ...ngs Feature Guide References 1 15 1 Paging 2 2 2 Group External Pager 1 Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group Value Range ON blue OFF Maintenance Console Location 5 12 3 4 Paging Group External Pager Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 15 1 Pagin...

Page 514: ... External Pager Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 15 1 Paging 2 2 2 Group 514 PC Programming Manual 5 12 3 4 Paging Group External Pager ...

Page 515: ...CD Groups see 1 2 2 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY in the Feature Guide Main Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ...

Page 516: ... of the incoming call distribution group Value Range All Distribution Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution FWD Mode Specifies whether extensions in FWD mode ring when a call is received at the incoming call distribution group Value Range No Ring Ring Mainte...

Page 517: ...es 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution Tenant Number Specifies the tenant to which the incoming call distribution group belongs to determine the Time Table and the audio source for the group The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number Value Range For KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 1 8 For KX TDA600 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Pr...

Page 518: ...k 4 13 2 7 3 Class of Service Internal Call Block Feature Guide References 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block CLIP on ICD Group Button Specifies the CLIP number sent to the network when making calls using the ICD Group button Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Gu...

Page 519: ...tings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Queuing Busy Destination Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the overflow destination of calls that cannot be queued in each time mode Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References 4 5 2 4 Week Tabl...

Page 520: ...the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 13 ...

Page 521: ...oup Group Settings Programming Manual References 4 5 2 4 Week Table Feature Guide References 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature 1 2 2 6 Overflow Feature Time out Manual Queue Redirection Overflow Time Specifies the length of time calls wait in a queue before they are redirected to the overflow destination Value Range None 10 n n 1 125 s Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group...

Page 522: ...ing Feature Queuing Time Table Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution gro...

Page 523: ...Manual References 4 5 2 4 Week Table Feature Guide References 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature Queuing Time Table When Extension Ringing Enables the PBX to play messages BGM to the caller according to the Queuing Time Table when the call arrives at an extension without being queued or after being queued Value Range Disable Ringback Tone Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribut...

Page 524: ...haracters Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension No Answer Redirection Time Specifies the length of time that a call queues at an extension before it is redirected to the next member extension of the incoming call distribution group in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution met...

Page 525: ...anual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Maximum No of Busy Extension Specifies the number of extensions that can accept calls simultaneously in the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max Call arrives at an idle extension 1 32 Call will not arrive at an idle extension when the number of busy extensions exceeds the assigned number Maintenance Console Location ...

Page 526: ...ble Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 5 VIP Call Supervisor Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the incoming call distribution group s supervisor The supervisor can monitor and control the status of each member of the group using a 6 line display PT The supe...

Page 527: ...mming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Group Log Group FWD To set extension numbers easily click Destination Setting see 2 1 6 Extension Number Setting Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming ...

Page 528: ...tribution group that can be logged in the call log memory Value Range 0 100 Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Incoming Call Log Group FWD Call from CO Setting Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls reference only Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location...

Page 529: ...es 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Group FWD Call from Extension Setting Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls reference only Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Group FWD Call from Extension Destination Specifies the forw...

Page 530: ...5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 530 PC Programming Manual 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings ...

Page 531: ...Number Setting To copy the members to another group click Member List Copy select the group and click OK Extension Number Specifies the extension number of each member In addition to the extension numbers of PT SLT PS and T1 OPX extensions floating extension numbers of PS Ring groups can also be specified Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 14 3 5 1 Incoming C...

Page 532: ...ension can accept another call This timer is used when Options Wrap up Timer based on is set to ICD Group Member in 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Value Range 10 n n 0 300 s Maintenance Console Location 5 14 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List Programming Manual References 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Options Wra...

Page 533: ...rflow destination when there is no answer Disconnect Disconnects the line Sequence 01 16 Redirects the call to a different sequence OGM 01 64 Sends a certain OGM Wait 5 n n 1 16 s If preceded by an OGM plays the Music on Hold for the specified period of time if not preceded by an OGM sends a ringback tone for the specified period of time Maintenance Console Location 5 15 3 5 2 Incoming Call Distri...

Page 534: ...Enhanced Phantom button mode When set to Enhanced Phantom mode creating an ICD Group button at an extension using PT personal programming automatically registers the extension as a member of the relevant ICD Group The extension user can also specify the delayed ringing settings Value Range Group DN Enhanced Phantom Maintenance Console Location 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellane...

Page 535: ...ngs and 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings become unavailable Value Range Extension The timer is activated after all calls to or from the extension including a retrieved call on hold ICD Group Member The timer is only activated after calls to the extension through an ICD Group Maintenance Console Location 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Programming Manual Refe...

Page 536: ...s to the group click Member List To assign extensions as overflow destinations easily click Destination Setting see 2 1 6 Extension Number Setting Hunting Group Name Specifies the name of the hunting group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 17 3 6 Extension Hunting Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting Hunting Type ...

Page 537: ...me mode Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 5 17 3 6 Extension Hunting Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting PC Programming Manual 537 5 17 3 6 Extension Hunting Group ...

Page 538: ...p member Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 18 3 6 Extension Hunting Group Member List Programming Manual References 5 17 3 6 Extension Hunting Group Feature Guide References 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension when an extension number is specified in Extension Number above reference only Value Range Max 20 characte...

Page 539: ...ort Property Extension Port Feature Guide References 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group Intercept to Mailbox Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the called extension to the VPS when a call is redirected to the VM DPT group by Intercept Routing When the VPS receives the mailbox number the VPS answers the call with the appropriate mailbox Value Range Disable Enable Maintena...

Page 540: ...he VPS and the call is not answered within a programmed time period 2 when the VPS is assigned as the Transfer Recall destination of a certain extension When the VPS receives the mailbox number the VPS answers the call with the appropriate mailbox Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 5 19 3 7 1 VM DPT Group System Settings Programming Manual References 3 5 1 1 Slot Port Property...

Page 541: ...ation 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Programming Manual References 3 5 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide References 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Group Name Specifies the name of the VM DPT group which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM DPT group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 20 ...

Page 542: ...ole Location 5 21 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type Type 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 5 21 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type Type 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Set...

Page 543: ... Indicates the VM port number for the port reference only Value Range For KX TDA30 1 4 For KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 1 12 Maintenance Console Location 5 21 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type Type 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Feature Guide References 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group Extension No Indicates the extension number assigned to the V...

Page 544: ... Mail VM Group 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 21 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type Type 5 20 3 7 2 VM DPT Group Unit Settings Feature Guide References 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Inte...

Page 545: ... called extension is ringing Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and P pause Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Status Signal Busy Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is busy Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and P pause Ma...

Page 546: ...intenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Status Signal Answer Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension has answered the call Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and P pause Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Program...

Page 547: ...s signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the caller hangs up Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and P pause Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Status Signal FWD to VM Ringback Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and...

Page 548: ...FWD to Extension Ringback Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to another extension and the PBX is calling the destination extension Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and P pause Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Command Re...

Page 549: ...ut having to dial the mailbox number manually Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 H mailbox number and P pause Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 1 Message Waiting VM DTMF Command Switching to AA Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from VM Service Mode to AA Service...

Page 550: ...Feature Guide References None Timing DTMF Length for VM Specifies the length of DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS Value Range 80 ms 160 ms Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Timing Inter digit Time Specifies the length of pause time between DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS Value Range 80 ms...

Page 551: ...ences None Timing Waiting Time before Sending VM DTMF Status Signal Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the DTMF status signal to the VPS after the VPS has finished dialling Value Range 0 5 s 1 0 s 1 5 s 2 0 s Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Others Call Waiting on VM Gr...

Page 552: ...o the VPS Value Range None Answer by Mailbox AA Maintenance Console Location 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Others Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is intercepted to the VPS so that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA ser...

Page 553: ... Group Group Settings Miscellaneous Programmed Mailbox No 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Programmed Mailbox No 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Programmed Mailbox No Feature Guide References None Others Message Waiting Lamp Control Specifies whether the PBX or VPS cancels the Message Waiting feature e g turning off the MESSAGE button light when an exte...

Page 554: ...Maintenance Console Location 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 1 Voice Mail VM Group Group Name Specifies the name of the VM DTMF group which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the VM DTMF group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Programming Manua...

Page 555: ...nsole Location 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration PC Programming Manual 555 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings ...

Page 556: ...e VPS Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 5 24 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Member List Programming Manual References 5 23 3 8 2 VM DTMF Group Group Settings Feature Guide References 1 24 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 24 3 8 2 VM D...

Page 557: ...S Ring Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 25 2 PS Ring Group Group Name Specifies the name of the PS ring group which will be shown on the display of extensions that call the PS ring group when Incoming Trunk Call Information Display on this screen is set to Called Number Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 25 3 9 PS Ring Group Programming ...

Page 558: ...nge Caller ID Called Number Maintenance Console Location 5 25 3 9 PS Ring Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 25 2 PS Ring Group 558 PC Programming Manual 5 25 3 9 PS Ring Group ...

Page 559: ...ecifies the extension number of the PS assigned to the PS Ring Group Value Range Max 4 digits Maintenance Console Location 5 26 3 9 PS Ring Group Member List Programming Manual References 5 25 3 9 PS Ring Group 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 25 2 PS Ring Group Extension Name Indicates the name of the PS reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Mainten...

Page 560: ...ing groups Up to 31 members can be assigned to each of 8 broadcasting groups To assign members to a group click Member List Broadcasting Group Name Specifies the name of the broadcasting group Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 27 3 10 Broadcasting Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Broadcasting 560 PC Programming Manual 5 27 3 10 Bro...

Page 561: ...Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 5 28 3 10 Broadcasting Group Member List Programming Manual References 5 27 3 10 Broadcasting Group Feature Guide References 1 16 1 Broadcasting Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension when an extension number is specified in Dial Number above reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5 28 3 10 Broadcasting ...

Page 562: ...562 PC Programming Manual 5 28 3 10 Broadcasting Group Member List ...

Page 563: ...Section 6 4 Extension PC Programming Manual 563 ...

Page 564: ... details Main Shelf KX TDA600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extensi...

Page 565: ...hanging the extension number make sure that the extension port is not in use If the extension number is changed while the port is in use the new extension number will not come into effect Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 6 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Feat...

Page 566: ...le Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 1 1 Extension Port Configuration Telephone Type Indicates the type of telephone connected to the extension port reference only Value Range DPT 15V DPT 40V DPT is connected APT 15V APT is connected DSS DSS Console is connected VM VPS is connected SLT SLT is connected or no telephon...

Page 567: ...e tenants call pickup groups and paging groups Value Range For KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 1 32 For KX TDA600 1 96 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 2 Group 2 2 3 Tenant Service COS Specifies the COS of the extension Value Range 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extens...

Page 568: ...udulent use we strongly recommend a Keeping PINs secret b Selecting complex random PINs that cannot be easily guessed c Changing PINs frequently Value Range Max 10 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN Intercept Destination She...

Page 569: ...Programming Manual References 3 5 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension To change the extension number of a wired extension follow the steps below 1 Type the new extension number then click Apply 2 Set the status of the extension port to OUS then INS When changing the extension number make sure that the ...

Page 570: ...gs Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Intercept Destination When called party does not answer Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing No Answer and Intercept Routing DND Note that Intercept Routing Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination When Called Party is Busy below Value Range Max...

Page 571: ...cret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing Intercept No Answer Time Shelf KX TDA600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None...

Page 572: ...on Number Specifies the extension number of the extension To change the extension number of a wired extension follow the steps below 1 Type the new extension number then click Apply 2 Set the status of the extension port to OUS then INS When changing the extension number make sure that the extension port is not in use If the extension number is changed while the port is in use the new extension nu...

Page 573: ...nswer Time Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode When this setting is set to 0 the system timer is used Value Range 0 240 s Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Intercept Routing N...

Page 574: ... Indicates the slot position of each extension card reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 574 PC Programming Manual ...

Page 575: ...he extension number is changed while the port is in use the new extension number will not come into effect Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 6 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension Valu...

Page 576: ...Subscriber Number in 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port or 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port ISDN CO Subscriber Number 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only CO Setting Subscriber Number...

Page 577: ...ll Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Option 1 Shelf KX TDA600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Se...

Page 578: ... 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension To change the extension number of a wired extension follow the steps below 1 Type the new extension number then click Apply 2 Set the status of the extension port to OUS then INS When changing the extension number make sure that the extension port is not in use If t...

Page 579: ...xtension number of the PS with which Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is established To enable Wireless XDP Parallel Mode the PS must be turned off once and then turned on after assigning this setting When changing the port type of an extension port in DPT Type Type on the 3 5 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port screen the Wireless XDP setting must be deleted first Value Range Max 4 digits consisting ...

Page 580: ... Voice Processing Systems VPS with DTMF Integration Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Transfer Recall Destination Specifies the transfer recall destination when an extension user transfers a call with the Call Transfe...

Page 581: ...ion Extension Settings Programming Manual References 10 6 8 5 Carrier Feature Guide References 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Option 2 Shelf KX TDA600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ...

Page 582: ...ension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension To change the extension number of a wired extension follow the steps below 1 Type the new extension number then click Apply 2 Set the status of the extension port to OUS then INS When changing the extension number make sure that the extension port is not in use If the extension number is changed while the port is in use the new extensio...

Page 583: ...anual C Waiting for Extension Call Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions Value Range Off No notification BSS Tone from the handset or built in speaker OHCA Voice from the built in speaker W OHCA Voice from the handset Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 3 ...

Page 584: ...utomatically after going off hook when the Hot Line feature is active Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Hot Line Pickup Dial Start Feature Guide References 1 6 1 7 Hot Line Pickup Dial No Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off hook wh...

Page 585: ...n Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 5 Data Line Security Option 3 Shelf KX TDA600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card reference...

Page 586: ...ension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension To change the extension number of a wired extension follow the steps below 1 Type the new extension number then click Apply 2 Set the status of the extension port to OUS then INS When changing the extension number make sure that the extension port is not in use If the extension number is changed while the port is in use the new extensio...

Page 587: ... Pickup Deny Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions Value Range Disable Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your extension Enable Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your extension Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Executive ...

Page 588: ... Max 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Absent Message Charge Limit Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the extension When this limit is reached the extension cannot be used to make further trunk calls The number of decimal places that can be specified here de...

Page 589: ... Voice Call Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 3 Intercom Call Option 4 Shelf KX TDA600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References N...

Page 590: ...ension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension To change the extension number of a wired extension follow the steps below 1 Type the new extension number then click Apply 2 Set the status of the extension port to OUS then INS When changing the extension number make sure that the extension port is not in use If the extension number is changed while the port is in use the new extensio...

Page 591: ... seized F 1 F 36 A trunk programmed for a flexible button F 1 F 36 is seized A flexible button customised as a Single CO Group CO Loop CO or ICD Group button must be selected For KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 No Line No line is seized Idle An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups ICM PDN An extension line is seized or for a PDN extension an idle PDN button is selected...

Page 592: ... A flexible button customised as a Single CO Group CO Loop CO or ICD Group button must be selected Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Feature Guide References 1 4 1 2 Line Preference Incoming Call Waiting Tone Type Selects the type of Call Waiting tone sent to the busy extension Value Ran...

Page 593: ...e built in speaker Private Monitor through the handset or the built in speaker after hearing a warning tone Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 11 1 Hands free Operation 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Option 5 Shelf KX TDA600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Sh...

Page 594: ...mber reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 5 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension To change the extension number of a wired extension follow the steps below 1 Type the new extension number then cli...

Page 595: ... Extension Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Display Language Selects the display language of the extension telephone Value Range Language1 Language5 Maintenanc...

Page 596: ...tion Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 20 4 Display Information Key Pad Tone Specifies whether key pad tones are heard when ...

Page 597: ... Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback Option 6 Shelf KX TDA600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None ...

Page 598: ...ension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension To change the extension number of a wired extension follow the steps below 1 Type the new extension number then click Apply 2 Set the status of the extension port to OUS then INS When changing the extension number make sure that the extension port is not in use If the extension number is changed while the port is in use the new extensio...

Page 599: ...ing calls both intercom and trunk calls without going off hook regardless of the Hands free Answerback setting Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flexible Button Programming Mode Specifies whether the extension user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation or only th...

Page 600: ... T7665 KX NT265 KX NT321 1 8 Even if ring tone 9 30 is selected ring tone 1 is heard Other telephones 1 8 Even if ring tone 9 30 is selected ring tone 2 is heard Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Display Lock SVM Lock Locks or unlocks the Incoming Call Log and Simplified Voice Message Log displ...

Page 601: ...red Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 15 1 Paging Option 7 Shelf KX TDA600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card...

Page 602: ...ension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension To change the extension number of a wired extension follow the steps below 1 Type the new extension number then click Apply 2 Set the status of the extension port to OUS then INS When changing the extension number make sure that the extension port is not in use If the extension number is changed while the port is in use the new extensio...

Page 603: ...erences None Feature Guide References None Character Input Mode Selects the character table to be used for entering characters Value Range Table 1 Standard mode Table 2 Option mode Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Mode during CO Conversation Selects the function of the FLASH RECALL butto...

Page 604: ...oming Call Log memory Value Range 0 100 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Incoming Call Log Outgoing Call Log Memory Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialled by the extension that are retained in the extension s Outgoing Call Log memory Value Range 1 100 Maintenance Console Location ...

Page 605: ...n Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY Option 8 Shelf KX TDA600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position ...

Page 606: ...To change the extension number of a wired extension follow the steps below 1 Type the new extension number then click Apply 2 Set the status of the extension port to OUS then INS When changing the extension number make sure that the extension port is not in use If the extension number is changed while the port is in use the new extension number will not come into effect Value Range Max 5 digits co...

Page 607: ...on goes on hook for the previous call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension Caller ID Sending Enables the extension to send Caller ID information to an SLT Note that for KX TDA30 the setting of this parameter is only effective when a resource for sending extensi...

Page 608: ...ond call s Caller ID information Note that for the KX TDA30 the setting of this parameter is only effective when a resource for sending extension Caller ID is assigned in Extension Caller ID Resource 1 2 KX TDA30 only for the port in 4 18 2 10 Extension CID Settings Value Range 0 15 s Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4 18 2 10 ...

Page 609: ...n Extension Settings Programming Manual References 5 14 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List Wrap up Timer 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Options Wrap up Timer based on Feature Guide References 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Option 9 Shelf KX TDA600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location...

Page 610: ...on Number Specifies the extension number of the extension To change the extension number of a wired extension follow the steps below 1 Type the new extension number then click Apply 2 Set the status of the extension port to OUS then INS When changing the extension number make sure that the extension port is not in use If the extension number is changed while the port is in use the new extension nu...

Page 611: ...g for calls to a PDN extension an extension with one or more PDN buttons Value Range Immediate 1 Ring 2 Rings 3 Rings 4 Rings 5 Rings 6 Rings Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension FWD DND Reference Call Forwarding FWD and Do Not...

Page 612: ...n card reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 5 1 1 Slot Port Property Extens...

Page 613: ... not come into effect Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 6 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Exte...

Page 614: ...e Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND FWD Mode for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls reference only Value Range None FWD All FWD Busy FWD N A FWD Busy N A Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Setti...

Page 615: ...orwarding FWD FWD Set for Call from Extension Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls reference only Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD DND Set for Call from Extension Indicates the current DND status for...

Page 616: ...uide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD FWD Destination for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls reference only Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Cal...

Page 617: ...Location 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD PC Programming Manual 617 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings ...

Page 618: ...es 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Location Entry Number to Generate Specifies the number of locations to be programmed A CLIP number will only be assigned to connected wired extensions even if the number entered here is larger than the total number of wired extensions Value Range 1 total number of connected wired extensions Maintenance Console Location 6 2 4 ...

Page 619: ...sole Location 6 2 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Parameter Tail of ID Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Consol...

Page 620: ...Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 620 PC Programming Manual 6 2 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings CLIP Generate ...

Page 621: ...bility Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming trunk calls Value Range OFF Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD DND button if forward settings have been programmed ON Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD DND button Maintenance Console Location 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

Page 622: ...ce Console Location 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Call from CO FWD Destination Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Programming Manual References None Feature...

Page 623: ...FWD DND button if forward settings have been programmed ON Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD DND button Maintenance Console Location 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Call from Extension DND Status Availability Enables or disables the DND feature for intercom calls Value Range O...

Page 624: ...References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Call from Extension FWD Destination Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD FWD No Answer Timer Specifies the length of tim...

Page 625: ...tenance Console Location 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD PC Programming Manual 625 6 3 4 1 2 Wired Extension FWD DND ...

Page 626: ... Speed Dialling Name Specifies the name of the Personal Speed Dialling number to call using the Personal Speed Dialling Directory shown on the extension s display Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 4 4 1 3 Wired Extension Speed Dial Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System Dialling Number Specifies the number to be...

Page 627: ...ion Key Setting Type Specifies the feature to be assigned to the flexible button Value Range Not Stored Loop CO Single CO Group CO DSS One touch ICD Group Message Waiting FWD DND Both FWD DND External FWD DND Internal Group Fwd Both Group Fwd External Group Fwd Internal Account Conference Terminate EFA Charge Call Park Call Log Log in Log out Hurry up Wrap up System Alarm Time Service Answer Relea...

Page 628: ... Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection for Call Park Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone Value Range Automatic Specific Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual Reference...

Page 629: ...al References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Parameter Selection for Time Service Selects which time modes are switched manually Value Range All Day Night Lunch Break Day Night Break Day Night Lunch Day Night Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Parameter Selection...

Page 630: ...e Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Parameter Selection for SDN KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button Value Range Immediate 1 Ring 2 Rings 3 Rings 4 Rings 5 Rings 6 Rings No Ring Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 7 1 Primary Dir...

Page 631: ...ion 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Ext No Floating Ext No for Message Waiting Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked If this cell is left empty the extension will check its own messages only Value Range Max 5 digits consisting ...

Page 632: ...g Ext No for Group FWD External Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are forwarded Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features Ext No Floating Ext No for ...

Page 633: ...y its own call log information Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Ext No Floating Ext No for Log in Log out Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log in to or log out from Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0...

Page 634: ... Specifies the floating extension number of the VM DPT group containing the extension s mailbox Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Ext No Floating Ext No for Two way Transfer Specifies the floating extension number of t...

Page 635: ...00 KX TDA600 only Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to this SDN button Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 7 1 Prim...

Page 636: ... 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Dial for NDSS Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station Selection Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table can be specified here Value...

Page 637: ...e Range KX DT300 series except KX DT321 KX T7600 series except KX T7665 IP PT except KX NT265 KX NT321 1 30 KX DT321 KX T7665 KX NT265 KX NT321 1 8 Even if ring tone 9 30 is selected ring tone 1 is heard Other telephones 1 8 Even if ring tone 9 30 is selected ring tone 2 is heard Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide...

Page 638: ...lue Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Display Option Key Setting Key Label Name The Key Label Name function allows you to print out a key label template for flexible buttons according to the telephone you are using Click a f...

Page 639: ... 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Ext No Floating Ext No for Group FWD Internal 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Ext No Floating Ext No for Call Log 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Ext No Floating Ext No for Log in Log out 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting...

Page 640: ...ion Key Setting Parameter Selection for Group CO 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Parameter Selection for Call Park 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Parameter Selection for Log in Log out 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Parameter Selection for Time Service 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible...

Page 641: ... Number for Call Park Feature Guide References None Mailbox Number This parameter is equivalent to Ext No of Mailbox on the Key Setting screen Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Ext No of Mailbox for Two way Transfer Feature Guide References None Label Specifies th...

Page 642: ...ifies the colour used for the label background for the corresponding button Click Choose to select a colour Value Range Any colour Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Font Size Specifies the size of the font on the label for the corresponding button Value Range 4 15 Maintenance Console Location 6 5 ...

Page 643: ...nt to print a key label template Value Range T7633 T7636 T7625 T7630 NT136 T7665 NT265 NT321 T7667 APT NT343 NT346 DT343 DT346 DT333 Other Maintenance Console Location 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 643 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button ...

Page 644: ...e extensions can be selected To select all extensions at once click Select All When selecting multiple extensions note that if the source extension has an SDN button the copy operation cannot be performed Maintenance Console Location 6 6 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Flexible button data copy Programming Manual References 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Feature Guide References N...

Page 645: ...ouch access Value Range Not Stored One Touch Maintenance Console Location 6 7 4 1 5 Wired Extension PF Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons Dial Specifies the number to be dialled Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 6 7 4 1 5 Wired Extension PF Button Programming Manual ...

Page 646: ...tatus data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension This setting is automatically set to ON when the feature is used and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF to cancel data transmission Value Range OFF ON Maintenance Console Location 6 8 4 1 6 Wired Extension NDSS Link Data Send Programming Manual References 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Dire...

Page 647: ... Message SVM in the Feature Guide Slot Indicates the slot position reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message...

Page 648: ...me Feature Guide References None Simplified Voice Message Selects which SVM ESVM card to use to store and play back greetings and messages for the extension Each extension must be assigned to a specific SVM ESVM card and block within the card and can only use the assigned card block If two SVM ESVM cards are installed in the PBX you should assign a number of extensions to each card to ensure that ...

Page 649: ...Log Specifies the maximum number of voice messages not including greeting messages that can be stored for the extension Value Range 1 100 Maintenance Console Location 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 649 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message ...

Page 650: ... of the PS reference only Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 48 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Progra...

Page 651: ...se tenants call pickup groups and paging groups Value Range For KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 1 32 For KX TDA600 1 96 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 2 Group 2 2 3 Tenant Service COS Specifies the COS of the PS Value Range 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extensio...

Page 652: ...eeping PINs secret b Selecting complex random PINs that cannot be easily guessed c Changing PINs frequently Value Range Max 10 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 28 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN Intercept Destination Extension Number Indicates the extensi...

Page 653: ...ntercept Routing DND Note that Intercept Routing Busy calls are routed using Intercept Destination When Called Party is Busy below Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Intercept Destination Intercept Destination When Call...

Page 654: ...e only Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 48 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual Refere...

Page 655: ...Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA Day Lunch Break Night Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing ISDN CLIP Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 48 1 2 Portable Statio...

Page 656: ...CLIP COLP CLIP on Extension CO Selects the CLIP number to show on the called party s telephone Value Range Extension Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID on the Option 1 tab CO Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port or 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable St...

Page 657: ...Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP COLR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the PS on the caller s telephone display when answering a call Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Prese...

Page 658: ...ences 3 48 1 2 Portable Station Extension Name Feature Guide References None Ring Pattern Table Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the PS Value Range 1 8 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4 14 2 8 1 Ring Tone Patterns Call from CO 4 15 2 8 2 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Doorphone 4 16 2 8 3 Ring Tone Patterns ...

Page 659: ...Call Transfer without Announcement feature and the transferred call is not answered within a certain time period Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 12 1 Call Transfer ARS Itemised Code Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for ident...

Page 660: ...s Programming Manual References 3 48 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 48 1 2 Portable Station Extension Name Feature Guide References None Manual C Waiting for Extension Call Selects the ...

Page 661: ...aintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting Pickup Dial Set Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature The number specified in Pickup Dial No on this screen is dialled automatically after going off hook when the Hot Line feature is active Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 ...

Page 662: ...Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 7 Hot Line Option 3 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 48 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifie...

Page 663: ...nsole Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Executive Override Deny Specifies whether calls can be interrupted by other extensions Value Range Disable Allows other extension users to interrupt an existing call Enable Prevents other extension users from interrupting an existing call Maintenance Console...

Page 664: ...s reached the PS cannot be used to make further trunk calls The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options Digits After Decimal Point in 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Value Range 0 9999999 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Feature Guide References 1 9 2 Budget Man...

Page 665: ...ized automatically from the programmed trunk groups ICM An extension line is seized F 1 F 12 A trunk programmed for a flexible button F 1 F 12 is seized A flexible button customised as a Single CO Group CO Loop CO or ICD Group button must be selected For KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 No Line No line is seized Idle An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups ICM PDN An ex...

Page 666: ...y The call arriving at any PDN button is selected F 1 F 12 The call arriving at a flexible button F 1 F 12 is selected A flexible button customised as a Single CO Group CO Loop CO or ICD Group button must be selected Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Feature Guide References 1 4 1 2 ...

Page 667: ... DPT Digital Integration Option 5 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 48 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters M...

Page 668: ...ing Call Display Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the PS s display Value Range Caller ID Name CO Line Name DDI DID Name Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 20 4 Display Information Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking Enables the first line of the display to show t...

Page 669: ...tenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 48 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 48 1 2 Portable Station Extension Name Feature ...

Page 670: ...s without limitation or only the One touch Dialling buttons When the mode is set to One touch Dial there is no need to enter 2 before the number when customising a One touch Dialling button Value Range No Limitation One touch Dial Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 2 One touch Dialling Option...

Page 671: ...Extension Name Feature Guide References None Character Input Mode Selects the character table to be used for entering characters Value Range Table 1 Standard mode Table 2 Option mode Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Mode during CO Conversation Selects the function of the FLASH RECALL b...

Page 672: ...coming Call Log memory Value Range 0 100 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Incoming Call Log Outgoing Call Log Memory Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialled by the PS that are retained in the PS s Outgoing Call Log memory Value Range 1 100 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 ...

Page 673: ...one Feature Guide References 1 21 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY Option 8 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 48 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Nam...

Page 674: ...Feature Guide References None Wrap up Timer Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before a PS will accept another call when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group This timer is used when Options Wrap up Timer based on is set to Extension in 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Value Range 0 3000 s Maintenance Console Location...

Page 675: ...ension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 48 1 2 Portable Station Extension Name Feature Guide References None PDN Delayed Ringing KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension an extension with one or more ...

Page 676: ...ation FWD DND Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS reference only Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3 48 1 2 Portable Station Extension No Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console L...

Page 677: ...s the current DND status for incoming trunk calls reference only Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND FWD Mode for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls reference only Value Range None FWD All FW...

Page 678: ... 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD FWD Set for Call from Extension Indicates the current FWD status for incoming intercom calls reference only Value Range Off On Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding...

Page 679: ...able Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD FWD Destination for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls reference only Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension ...

Page 680: ...warded reference only Value Range 0 120 s Maintenance Console Location 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 680 PC Programming Manual 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings ...

Page 681: ...ces 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Location Entry Number to Generate Specifies the number of locations to be programmed A CLIP number will only be assigned to registered PS extensions even if the number entered here is larger than the total number of PS extensions Value Range 1 total number of connected wired extensions Maintenance Console Location 6 11 4 2 1...

Page 682: ...e Location 6 11 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Parameter Tail of ID Specifies a suffix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Conso...

Page 683: ...Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP PC Programming Manual 683 6 11 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings CLIP Generate ...

Page 684: ...Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming trunk calls Value Range OFF Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD DND button if forward settings have been programmed ON Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD DND button Maintenance Console Location 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 ...

Page 685: ... Console Location 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Call from CO FWD Destination Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Programming Manual References None Featu...

Page 686: ...D button if forward settings have been programmed ON Prevents extensions from switching to FWD mode by pressing the FWD DND button Maintenance Console Location 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Call from Extension DND Status Availability Enables or disables the DND feature for incoming intercom calls Value Ra...

Page 687: ...de References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Call from Extension FWD Destination Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD FWD No Answer Time Specifies the length of...

Page 688: ...nance Console Location 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 688 PC Programming Manual 6 12 4 2 2 Portable Station FWD DND ...

Page 689: ...th Group Fwd External Group Fwd Internal Account Conference Terminate EFA Charge Call Park Log in Log out Hurry up Wrap up Time Service TRS Level Change ISDN Service CLIR COLR ISDN Hold Time Service Automatic Manual Two way Record Two way Transfer LCS Voice Mail Transfer NDSS CTI PDN KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only SDN KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 P...

Page 690: ...lexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection for Call Park Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone Value Range Automatic Specific Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1...

Page 691: ...ferences None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Parameter Selection for Time Service Selects which time modes are switched manually Value Range All Day Night Lunch Break Day Night Break Day Night Lunch Day Night Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Parameter Selection fo...

Page 692: ...nly Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button The value specified here is only used when System Wireless SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only on 4 17 2 9 System Options is set to Enable Value Range Immediate 1 Ring 2 Rings 3 Rings 4 Rings 5 Rings 6 Rings No Ring Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Progr...

Page 693: ...nge Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Ext No Floating Ext No for Message Waiting Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked If this cell is left empty the PS will check its...

Page 694: ...ot Disturb DND Features Ext No Floating Ext No for Group Fwd External Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are forwarded Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb ...

Page 695: ...e Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Ext No Floating Ext No for Hurry up Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected Manual Queue Redirection Value Range Max 5 digits consisting ...

Page 696: ...er Specifies the floating extension number of the VM DPT group containing the desired mailbox Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Ext No Floating Ext No for Voice Mail Transfer Specifies the floating extension number o...

Page 697: ...ming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Dial for One touch Specifies the number to be dialled The PBX can have a maximum of 500 with the KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or 1000 with the KX TDA600 One touch Dialling buttons for PSs Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash M...

Page 698: ...in 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table can be specified here Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Optional Parameter or Ringing Tone Type Number for Time Service Specifies the Time Table ...

Page 699: ...cifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One touch Two way Transfer For example a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss If the cell is left empty the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible ...

Page 700: ... 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Group Fwd External 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Group Fwd Internal 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Log in Log out 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Butto...

Page 701: ...g Parameter Selection for Single CO 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Parameter Selection for Group CO 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Parameter Selection for Call Park 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Parameter Selection for Log in Log out 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button D...

Page 702: ... 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Display Option Key Setting Optional Parameter or Ringing Tone Type Number for Call Park Feature Guide References None Mailbox Number This parameter is equivalent to Ext No of Mailbox on the Key Setting screen Maintenance Console Location 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Disp...

Page 703: ...d To select all PSs at once click Select All When selecting multiple extensions note that if the source extension has an SDN button the copy operation cannot be performed Maintenance Console Location 6 14 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Flexible button data copy Programming Manual References 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 703 ...

Page 704: ...us data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension This setting is automatically set to ON when the feature is used and can only be manually changed from ON to OFF to cancel data transmission Value Range OFF ON Maintenance Console Location 6 15 4 2 4 Portable Station NDSS Link Data Send Programming Manual References 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network ...

Page 705: ...e extension number reference only Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References 3 48 1 2 Portable Station Feature Guide References None Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension reference only Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Si...

Page 706: ...1 Card2 For KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 None Card1 A Card1 B Card2 A Card2 B Maintenance Console Location 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Maximum of SVM Log Specifies the maximum number of voice messages not including greeting messages that can be stored for the e...

Page 707: ...e settings separately from system data For more information on flexible buttons see 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons in the Feature Guide Pair Extension Specifies the extension number of the PT to be used in pair with the DSS Console Note that if one or more SDN buttons have been set at the DSS Console they must be deleted before this setting can be changed Value Range None Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 M...

Page 708: ...Range For KX TDA30 1 54 For KX TDA100 KX TDA200 1 128 For KX TDA600 1 640 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection for Group CO Specifies the trunk group to be accessed Value Range For KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 1 64 For KX TDA600 1 96 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console 70...

Page 709: ...g out Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to are logged in to or logged out from Value Range None The incoming call distribution group is selected manually All All incoming call distribution groups that the paired extension belongs to Incoming Group A pre specified incoming call distribution group Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Pro...

Page 710: ...certain extension Value Range 1 7 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 1 9 4 Dial Tone Transfer Parameter Selection for Time Service Automatic Manual Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic Value Range 1 8 Maintenance Console ...

Page 711: ...mary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SDN Extension Ext No Floating Ext No for DSS Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Ext No Floating Ext No for ICD Group Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming ...

Page 712: ...al References None Feature Guide References None Ext No Floating Ext No for Group Fwd Both Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk calls are forwarded Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD...

Page 713: ...intenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features Ext No Floating Ext No for Call Log Specifies the paired extension s number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which call log information is displayed If the cell is left empty the paired extension w...

Page 714: ...rry up Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected Manual Queue Redirection Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature Ext No Floating Ext No for Two way Record Specifies the floating ...

Page 715: ...Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Ext No Floating Ext No for Voice Mail Transfer Specifies the floating extension number of the VM DTMF DPT group containing the desired mailbox Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References No...

Page 716: ... number to be dialled The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 with the KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or 5000 with the KX TDA600 One touch Dialling buttons for extensions and DSS Consoles Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 2 One touch Dialling ...

Page 717: ... 16 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer Secret P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Time Service Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode Value Range 1 8 Mainten...

Page 718: ...umber for Call Park Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with Parameter Selection for Call Park on this screen set to Specific is pressed Value Range 0 99 Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 13 2 Call Park Ext No of Mailbox for Two way Transfer Specifies the number of t...

Page 719: ...ng Manual References 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Display Option Key Setting Type Feature Guide References None Extension Number This parameter is equivalent to Ext No Floating Ext No on the Key Setting screen Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Display Option Key Setting Ext No Floating Ext No for DSS 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Display Option Key...

Page 720: ...creen Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Display Option Key Setting Dial for One touch 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Display Option Key Setting Dial for ISDN Service 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Display Option Key Setting Dial for NDSS Feature Guide References None Parameter 1 This parameter is equivalent to Parameter Selection on the Key Setting sc...

Page 721: ... Type Number for Time Service 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Display Option Key Setting Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Loop CO Single CO Group CO ICD Group SDN 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Display Option Key Setting Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Call Park Feature Guide References None Mailbox Number This parameter is equivalent to Ext No of Mailbox on the Key Setting screen Mainte...

Page 722: ...e to select a colour Value Range Any colour Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Color of Background Specifies the colour used for the label background for the corresponding button Click Choose to select a colour Value Range Any colour Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None 7...

Page 723: ...4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSS Type DSS Type Selects the type of DSS Console for which you want to print a key label template Value Range T7640 Other Maintenance Console Location 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual 723 6 17 4 3 DSS Console ...

Page 724: ...tion DSS Console Select the number of the DSS Console and paired extension Multiple DSS Consoles can be selected To select all DSS Consoles at once click Select All When selecting multiple extensions note that if the source extension has an SDN button the copy operation cannot be performed Maintenance Console Location 6 18 4 3 DSS Console DSS key data copy Programming Manual References 6 17 4 3 DS...

Page 725: ...Section 7 5 Optional Device PC Programming Manual 725 ...

Page 726: ... 5 1 Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call Physical Location Slot Indicates the slot to which the doorphone is connected reference only Value Range For KX TDA30 Slot number For KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 Slot and sub slot number Maintenance Console Location 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 1 ...

Page 727: ...sole Location 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call Destination Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the destination number of doorphone calls for each port in each time mode Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Secret and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Programming Manual References 4 5 2 4 Week Table PC Progra...

Page 728: ...Call 2 2 3 Tenant Service COS Specifies the Class of Service COS number COS programming determines the doorphone ports that are able to make trunk calls and sets restrictions on intercom calls from certain extensions Internal Call Block Value Range 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Programming Manual References 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings TRS TRS Level Day Lunch Brea...

Page 729: ...f a VM DPT group The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller Value Range 1 48 Maintenance Console Location 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration PC Programming Manual 729 7 1 5 1 Doorphone ...

Page 730: ...ting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 7 2 5 2 External Pager Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 15 1 Paging 1 17 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 1 17 4 Background Music BGM Page Number 1 Page Number 2 Name Specifies the name of the external pager Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 7 2 5 2 External Pager Programming Manual References None ...

Page 731: ...nd trunk calls can be made Trunk Intercom calls and TIE line calls without PBX code can be made TIE line calls with PBX code and trunk calls are restricted All All calls are restricted Maintenance Console Location 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9 5 Walking COS 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry DISA Security Remote Walking COS through D...

Page 732: ...ts are busy Selects how DISA calls are handled if all DISA ports are currently in use Value Range to Operator to AA 0 to AA 9 Disable Busy Tone Maintenance Console Location 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DISA Intercept Intercept when No Dial after DISA answers Selects how DISA calls are handled if the caller does not select any ...

Page 733: ...e Message DISA System Programming Manual References 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Option 1 CO CO with DISA Fwd Transfer to Public CO Feature Guide References None CO CO with DISA DISA to Private Network Specifies whether the DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk to private trunk call using DISA is established To enable this setting CO CO with DISA Fwd Transfer to Private Net...

Page 734: ...Programming Manual References 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Option 1 CO CO with DISA DISA to Public CO Feature Guide References None CO CO with DISA Fwd Transfer to Private Network Enables trunk to private trunk calls to be established using DISA Value Range Disable Trunk to private trunk calls are established without using DISA Enable Get DISA Trunk to private trunk calls are established us...

Page 735: ...aller to return to the DISA top menu by pressing while hearing a ringback reorder or busy tone If disabled retrying the call is possible by pressing Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Option 2 DISA Cyclic Tone Detection Selects the cyclic tone detection mode Cyclic tone detecti...

Page 736: ...uration of the cyclic tone that will be recognised by the PBX When the tone sent from the telephone company is shorter than the value set here the PBX recognises it as a tone on Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to Option To apply changes to this setting follow the steps below 1 Change this setting 2 Set the status of the MSG ESVM card KX T...

Page 737: ...DISA System Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot 3 41 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Feature Guide References None DISA Cyclic Tone Option Repeating Times of ON OFF for Detection Specifies the number of times the tone pattern a set of tone on and tone off must be received to establish reception of the cyclic tone This determines the end of call Note that this ...

Page 738: ...ng time available on the card To apply changes to this setting follow the steps below 1 Change this setting 2 Set the status of the OPB3 card to OUS then INS Value Range Low About 120 minutes of messages can be recorded per card Middle About 60 minutes of messages can be recorded per card High About 40 minutes of messages can be recorded per card Maintenance Console Location 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Messag...

Page 739: ...2 Voice Message DISA Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Name Specifies the name of the OGM Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 5 Outgoing Message OGM 1 17 6 Direct Inward Sys...

Page 740: ... Value Range None 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message Programming Manual References 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Fax Extension KX TDA30 only Specifies the extension number to which to transfer a call when the MSG card detects a fax signal Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance...

Page 741: ...Feature Guide References 1 17 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 1 17 7 Automatic Fax Transfer PC Programming Manual 741 7 4 5 3 2 Voice Message DISA Message ...

Page 742: ...ences 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM SVM Card No 1 2 Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number used to access the SVM ESVM card Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM SVM Card No 1 2 Card Name Spe...

Page 743: ...corded per card Maintenance Console Location 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM Programming Manual References 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Message Feature Guide References 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Remote Access Selects whether the Walking COS feature can be used while listening to a greeting message from the SVM featur...

Page 744: ...ves is optional as specified in SVM Cyclic Tone Option on this screen Maintenance Console Location 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM SVM Cyclic Tone Option Tone On Maximum Time Specifies the maximum duration of the cyclic tone that will be recognised by the PBX When the tone sent from the tel...

Page 745: ...f the SVM ESVM card KX TDA30 or OPB3 card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 to OUS then INS Value Range 20 n n 6 200 ms Maintenance Console Location 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM Programming Manual References 3 1 1 1 Slot Feature Guide References 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM SVM Cyclic Tone Option Repeating Times of ON OFF for Detection Specifies the number of times the tone pattern a se...

Page 746: ...Feature Guide References 1 17 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM 746 PC Programming Manual 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM ...

Page 747: ...ernal Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 10 External Relay Control Physical Location Shelf KX TDA600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 7 6 5 4 External Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 10 External Relay Control Physical Location Slot Indicates the slot posi...

Page 748: ...0 External Relay Control Physical Location Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 7 6 5 4 External Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 10 External Relay Control Name Specifies the relay name Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 7 6 5 4 External Relay 748 PC Programming Manual 7 6 5 ...

Page 749: ... References 1 17 10 External Relay Control COS Number Specifies the Class of Service COS number COS programming determines the extensions that are able to activate relays Value Range 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 7 6 5 4 External Relay Programming Manual References 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Optional Device Other Extensions External Relay Access Feature Guide References 1 1 2 2 I...

Page 750: ... TDA30 1 4 For KX TDA100 KX TDA200 1 16 KX TDA600 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 7 7 5 5 External Sensor Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 9 External Sensor Physical Location Shelf KX TDA600 only Indicates the shelf position reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 7 7 5 5 External Sensor Programming Manual References None Feature Guide...

Page 751: ...es None Feature Guide References 1 17 9 External Sensor Physical Location Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 7 7 5 5 External Sensor Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 9 External Sensor Name Specifies the sensor name Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 7 7 5 5 External Sensor PC Pro...

Page 752: ...ramming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 17 9 External Sensor Tenant No Specifies the tenant to which the sensor belongs to determine the Time Table for the sensor The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number Value Range For KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 1 8 KX TDA600 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 7 7 5 5 External Sensor Programming Manual References 4 5 2 4 Week Tabl...

Page 753: ...Section 8 6 Feature PC Programming Manual 753 ...

Page 754: ...DA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or EMEC KX TDA600 card depends on the setting of System Speed Dial in 8 6 6 6 Tenant Value Range For KX TDA30 Basic Memory the standard table Expanded Memory additional table only available when an MEC card is installed to the PBX For KX TDA100 KX TDA200 Basic Memory the standard table Expanded Memory for Tenant 1 8 additional tables only available when an MEC card is inst...

Page 755: ...uide References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System 1 18 1 Caller ID CLI Destination Specifies the CLI destination extension to which incoming calls from the programmed telephone number are routed If a Caller ID Modification Table is being used the modified number must match the telephone number above CO Line Access Number Telephone Number in order for the call to be routed correctly Value Rang...

Page 756: ...Feature Guide References 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution 1 18 1 Caller ID 756 PC Programming Manual 8 1 6 1 System Speed Dial ...

Page 757: ...eatures SUMMARY 1 27 2 Room Status Control SMDR for External Hotel Application 1 Room Status Control Selects whether check in and check out data is output on SMDR Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References 13 1 11 1 Main Feature Guide References 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 27 2 Room Status Control SMDR for External ...

Page 758: ... This character can be used a maximum of seven times in a Printing Message Value Range Max 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References 13 1 11 1 Main Feature Guide References 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 26 2 Printing Message Bill Checkout Billing Billing for Guest Need MEC Card Activates call billing features for the PBX Call bil...

Page 759: ...ng for Guest Room Checkout Billing LCD for Minibar Specifies the name of charge item 2 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering room charges Value Range Max 12 characters Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 27 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing LCD for Others Specifies the name of c...

Page 760: ...cters Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 27 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing Bill SMDR for Minibar Specifies the name of charge item 2 as printed on the guest bill Value Range Max 12 characters Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 27 ...

Page 761: ...s the language used for standard items shown on guest bills printed out using the Call Billing feature Value Range Language 1 Language 5 Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 27 3 Call Billing for Guest Room SMDR for External Hotel Application Header 1 3 Specifies the text printed at the top of the guest bill Value Range Max...

Page 762: ...uest Room Charge Margin Tax Margin Rate for Telephone Specifies the percentage margin to be added to telephone charges displayed on the guest bill Value Range 0 00 99 99 Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 3 Call Charge Services 1 27 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Margin Tax Tax Rate for Telephone Specifies the percentag...

Page 763: ...99 99 Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 27 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Margin Tax Tax Rate for Others Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest charges for charge item 3 Value Range 0 00 99 99 Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Re...

Page 764: ...ge Options Currency Specifies the currency characters shown on the display of the extension and the SMDR Value Range Max 3 characters Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 8 3 6 3 Verification Code Budget Management Featur...

Page 765: ...rsation Value Range Alarm Only a warning tone is heard Alarm Disconnect A warning tone is heard and then the call is disconnected Maintenance Console Location 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Programming Manual References 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit Feature Guide References 1 9 2 Budget Management Charg...

Page 766: ...1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 3 Charge Limit Feature Guide References 1 26 3 Call Charge Services 766 PC Programming Manual 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge ...

Page 767: ...sole Location 8 3 6 3 Verification Code Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry User Name Specifies the user name assigned to the verification code Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 8 3 6 3 Verification Code Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry Verification Code PIN Speci...

Page 768: ... Number Specifies the COS that applies when making a trunk call with the verification code Value Range 1 64 Maintenance Console Location 8 3 6 3 Verification Code Programming Manual References 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Feature Guide References 1 9 6 Verification Code Entry 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Itemised Billing Code for ARS Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS fe...

Page 769: ... on the verification code The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options Digits After Decimal Point in 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Value Range 0 9999999 Maintenance Console Location 8 3 6 3 Verification Code Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9 2 Budget Management PC Programming Manual 769 8 3 6 3 Verification Code ...

Page 770: ...s of codes click the applicable tab Second Dial Tone Waiting Code Specifies the Second Dial Tone Waiting code Value Range Max 4 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 8 4 6 4 Second Dial Tone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion Pause Repeating Counter Specifies the number of pauses to be inserted when waiting for the second dial to...

Page 771: ... maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed and any extension user can select one of them Absent Message Specifies the message for display Value Range Max 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 8 5 6 5 Absent Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Absent Message PC Programming Manual 771 8 5 6 5 Absent Message ...

Page 772: ...600 Same as System Setting BGM 1 BGM 2 Tone Maintenance Console Location 8 6 6 6 Tenant Programming Manual References 4 3 2 2 Operator BGM Feature Guide References 1 13 4 Music on Hold 2 2 3 Tenant Service Operator Extension Number Specifies the extension number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be designated as the tenant operator When this parameter is le...

Page 773: ...tic Route Selection ARS 2 2 3 Tenant Service System Speed Dial Specifies which system speed dialling table is used by the tenant This setting is only available when an MEC KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or EMEC KX TDA600 card is installed Value Range For KX TDA30 Basic Memory PBX basic system speed dialling numbers are used Expanded Memory Expansion system speed dialling numbers are used For KX TDA1...

Page 774: ...2 2 3 Tenant Service 774 PC Programming Manual 8 6 6 6 Tenant ...

Page 775: ...Section 9 7 TRS PC Programming Manual 775 ...

Page 776: ...e leading digits of the dialled number are not found in the applicable Denied Code Tables the call is made A maximum of 100 denied codes can be programmed for each level 20 codes are displayed at a time To display other sets of codes click the applicable tab Denied Code Tables Level 2 Level 6 Specifies the leading digits of toll restricted numbers for each level Value Range Max 16 digits consistin...

Page 777: ...les is checked against the applicable Exception Code Tables and if a match is found the call is made A maximum of 100 exception codes can be programmed for each level 20 codes are displayed at a time To display other sets of codes click the applicable tab Exception Code Tables Level 2 Level 6 Specifies the leading digits of the numbers to be exempted from toll restriction call barring for each lev...

Page 778: ...A maximum of 20 with the KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or 100 with the KX TDA600 Special Carrier Access Codes can be programmed With the KX TDA600 20 codes are displayed at a time To show other sets of codes click the applicable tab Special Carrier Access Code Specifies a Special Carrier Access Code Special Carrier Access Codes and Host PBX Access codes should be unique Value Range Max 16 digits co...

Page 779: ...regarded A maximum of 10 emergency numbers can be programmed Emergency Number Specifies the numbers used for making emergency calls It is not necessary to start the emergency number with a Trunk Access number Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 T Transfer P Pause and F Flash Maintenance Console Location 9 4 7 4 Emergency Dial Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 ...

Page 780: ...ure Guide References 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring TRS Check for Dial Enables a TRS Barring check for the user dialled and This is useful in preventing unauthorised calls which could possibly be made through certain telephone company exchanges Value Range No Check Check Maintenance Console Location 9 5 7 5 Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References ...

Page 781: ...ves a trunk call If the number of dialled digits exceeds the programmed limit the line will be disconnected Value Range None 1 7 Maintenance Console Location 9 5 7 5 Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 9 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 1 11 8 Trunk Call Limitation TRS Check after EFA Enables TRS Barring to check the digits dialled after External ...

Page 782: ...eny Table 2_N Except Table N_6 The Denied Code Tables for the higher levels are applied to all levels below it and the Exception Code Tables for the lower levels are applied to all levels above it Deny Table N Except Table N Each level has its own separate set of denied codes and exception codes which are only applied to that level Maintenance Console Location 9 5 7 5 Miscellaneous Programming Man...

Page 783: ...Section 10 8 ARS PC Programming Manual 783 ...

Page 784: ...on user makes a call using Idle Line Access Trunk Access or S CO Line Access method Maintenance Console Location 10 1 8 1 System Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Mode When Any Carrier is not programmed for the Dial Selects what happens when the dialled number is not found in Leading Number in 10 2 8 2 Lead...

Page 785: ...f digits of the user dialled number excluding the leading number 100 leading numbers are displayed at a time To display other sets of leading numbers click the applicable tab Leading Number Specifies the leading number Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and X Maintenance Console Location 10 2 8 2 Leading Number Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic R...

Page 786: ...ing number Value Range For KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 1 16 For KX TDA600 1 48 Maintenance Console Location 10 2 8 2 Leading Number Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 786 PC Programming Manual 10 2 8 2 Leading Number ...

Page 787: ...ables and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list To adjust the currently displayed Routing Plan click and drag the divisions between two time periods To programme the time blocks of the currently displayed Routing Plan including adding or deleting time blocks click Time Setting PC Programming Manual 787 10 3 8 3 ...

Page 788: ...Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 10 4 8 3 Routing Plan Time Time Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Time A D Hour Minute Specifies the start time for each time block Value Range 00 00 23 59 Maintenance Console Location 10 4 8 3 Routing Plan Time Time Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide...

Page 789: ... the desired day of the week by clicking the applicable tab Time A Time D Specifies the carrier to be given priority for each time zone Value Range For KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 None 1 10 For KX TDA600 None 1 48 Maintenance Console Location 10 5 8 4 Routing Plan Priority Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS PC Programming Manual 789 10...

Page 790: ...ocation 10 6 8 5 Carrier Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Removed Number of Digits Specifies the number of leading digits to remove from the user dialled number Value Range 0 15 Maintenance Console Location 10 6 8 5 Carrier Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Modify Command ...

Page 791: ...ge Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 10 6 8 5 Carrier Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS TRG 01 TRG 64 KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or TRG 01 TRG 96 KX TDA600 Selects the trunk groups that connect to the carrier TRG 01 TRG 64 KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or TRG 01 TRG 96 KX TDA600 Enables each trun...

Page 792: ...ing A command in Modify Command on the Carrier tab Authorisation Code for Tenant Tenant 1 Tenant 32 Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each tenant Note For the KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only up to 8 tenants are available Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 6 8 5 Carrier Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 10...

Page 793: ...ifferent leading number exceptions can be programmed 40 leading number exception entries are displayed on the screen at a time To display other sets click the applicable tab Leading Number Exception Specifies the leading number exception Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and X Maintenance Console Location 10 7 8 6 Leading Number Exception Programming Manual References None Feature Guide ...

Page 794: ...ay other groups click the applicable tab Authorisation Code for Trunk Group TRG 01 TRG 64 KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or TRG 01 TRG 96 KX TDA600 Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each trunk group Value Range Max 10 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 10 8 8 7 Authorisation Code for TRG Programming Manual References 10 6 8 5 Carrier Carrier Modify Command F...

Page 795: ...Section 11 9 Private Network PC Programming Manual 795 ...

Page 796: ...ets from a total of 8 are displayed at a time To display other priority sets click the applicable tab Using a private network up to 8 PBXs can share one VPS centralised VM connected to another PBX This VPS can provide voice mail for extensions attached to any of the PBXs in the network Own PBX Code Specifies the PBX code of the local PBX when using PBX Code Method numbering on a TIE line network I...

Page 797: ...e Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the dialled number in place of the removed digits for each priority Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 and P Pause Maintenance Console Location 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Trunk Group Specifies the trunk group to be used for TIE line calls for each priority Value R...

Page 798: ...Console Location 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Enhanced QSIG Call Information Optional SD Card Required Enables Network Message Waiting information to be sent from the PBX to which the VPS is attached to extensions connected to other PBXs in the network Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 11 1 9 1 TIE Tabl...

Page 799: ...wo PBXs will cause network data transmission problems Changing this value in Interactive mode will automatically clear any NDSS Link Data Value Range 0 The PBX retransmits BLF data sent by other PBXs 1 The PBX receives BLF data sent by other PBXs 2 8 The PBX transmits BLF data over the network Maintenance Console Location 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References None Featur...

Page 800: ... 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature Data Transmission Counter Specifies the maximum number of hops or transmissions between two PBXs before a packet of BLF data is discarded Value Range 1 63 Maintenance Console Location 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Dire...

Page 801: ...being cancelled Value Range 0 10 Maintenance Console Location 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Enhanced QSIG Call Information Optional SD Card Required Feature Guide References 1 30 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature Data Re transmission Repeat Timer Specifies the length of time between repeated re ...

Page 802: ... Manual References 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Enhanced QSIG Call Information Optional SD Card Required Feature Guide References 1 30 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail 802 PC Programming Manual 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission ...

Page 803: ...at the monitor PBX can be specified here Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 11 3 9 3 Network Operator VoIP Programming Manual References 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature Network PBX ID Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS IP GW Card Slot No to notify BLF data to...

Page 804: ...Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS 804 PC Programming Manual 11 3 9 3 Network Operator VoIP ...

Page 805: ... extension attached to another PBX that will be monitored The number input here can use either Extension Number Method or PBX Code Method Value Range Max 16 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 30 Networking Features 1 30 1 TIE Line Service 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Netwo...

Page 806: ...on is connected to reference only Value Range None 1 8 Maintenance Console Location 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table Programming Manual References 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature Network PBX ID Feature Guide References 1 30 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS 806 PC Programming Manual 11 4 9 4 NDSS Key Table ...

Page 807: ...Section 12 10 CO Incoming Call PC Programming Manual 807 ...

Page 808: ... only Indicates the shelf position of each trunk card reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Physical Slot Indicates the slot position of each trunk card reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Programming Manual References...

Page 809: ...nsole Location 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CO Name Specifies the trunk name which is shown on the extension s display when receiving a call from the trunk Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 20 4 Display Information PC Progr...

Page 810: ...h the trunk belongs Value Range KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 1 64 KX TDA600 1 96 Maintenance Console Location 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 2 Group 810 PC Programming Manual 12 1 10 1 CO Line Settings ...

Page 811: ...k to which DIL distribution is set different DIL destinations can be programmed depending on the time mode day lunch break night Generally DIL distribution is used for trunk calls from analogue trunks Tenant number and VM trunk group number can also be programmed for each trunk To assign DIL destination numbers enter directly or click Destination Setting see 2 1 6 Extension Number Setting Shelf KX...

Page 812: ... trunk card type reference only Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each trunk reference only Value Range Public Private TIE VPN Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings 812 PC...

Page 813: ...epends on the DDI DID number of the calls MSN Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY DIL Destination Day Lunch Break Night Specifies the DIL destination in each time mode Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance ...

Page 814: ...s the floating extension number of a VM DPT Group The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller Value Range 1 48 Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration CLI for DIL When CLI distribution is...

Page 815: ...g Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each trunk card reference only Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Se...

Page 816: ...etworking type of each trunk reference only Value Range Public Private TIE VPN Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY 1 30 1 TIE Line Service 1 30 3 Virtual Private Network VPN Distribution Method Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls The value range o...

Page 817: ...on in each time mode Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution DDI DID TIE MSN For each trunk to which DDI DID distribution is set or for each trunk whose Trunk Property on this screen is Private TIE modification...

Page 818: ...Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number reference only Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None 818 PC Programming Manual 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Setti...

Page 819: ...References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY 1 30 1 TIE Line Service 1 30 3 Virtual Private Network VPN Distribution Method Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls The value range of this setting depends on the card type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk Value Range DIL Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arri...

Page 820: ...re Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 1 30 1 TIE Line Service DDI DID TIE MSN Additional Dial Specifies the number to be added to the incoming called number in the place of the removed digits for DDI DID distribution or for TIE line service Value Range Max 8 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Conso...

Page 821: ... 6 Extension Number Setting It is possible to programme DDI DID numbers and DDI DID destinations in each time mode day lunch break night for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Automatic Registration or to programme DDI DID names for a set of locations in series at once by clicking Name Generate DDI DID Number Specifies the DDI DID number Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 an...

Page 822: ... DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 30 1 TIE Line Service Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day Value Range For KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 1 8 For KX TDA600 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Programming Manual References 4 5 2 4 Week Table Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward D...

Page 823: ...Direct Dialling In DDI 1 24 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration CLI Ring for DDI DID Day Lunch Break Night Enables CLI distribution in each time mode Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Programming Manual References 8 1 6 1 System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Identific...

Page 824: ...ect Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Generate DDI DID Number From Specifies the DID number of the first location to be programmed DDI DID numbers for subsequent locations will be generated automatically by adding one to the value of the previous location Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 4 10 3 DDI DID Table Automatic Registration Programming Man...

Page 825: ...for a certain time mode click the appropriate Same all check box If the Same all check box for a certain time mode is not clicked the destination numbers for subsequent locations will be generated automatically by adding one to the value of the previous location for that time mode Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 12 4 10 3 DDI DID Table Automatic Registration...

Page 826: ...es 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Number to Generate Specifies the number of locations to be programmed Value Range 1 1000 Maintenance Console Location 12 5 10 3 DDI DID Table Name Generate Programming Manual References 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In D...

Page 827: ...5 10 3 DDI DID Table Name Generate Programming Manual References 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Name Suffix Specifies the text to be included at the end of each DDI DID name Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 5 10 3 DDI DID Table Name Generate Programming Manual References 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table...

Page 828: ...ers Select the card to programme or select All to display all matching cards MSN To assign MSN destination numbers enter directly or click Destination Setting see 2 1 6 Extension Number Setting Shelf KX TDA600 only Indicates the shelf number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 12 6 10 4 MSN Table Programming Manual Re...

Page 829: ...nd Maintenance Console Location 12 6 10 4 MSN Table Programming Manual References 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Feature Guide References 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service MSN Name Specifies the name for the MSN which is shown on the extension s display when receiving a call with the MSN Value Range Max 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 12 6 10 4 MSN Table Progr...

Page 830: ...the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day Value Range For KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 1 8 For KX TDA600 1 32 Maintenance Console Location 12 6 10 4 MSN Table Programming Manual References 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port 4 5 2 4 Week Table Feature Guide References 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service VM Trunk Group No Specifies the number of ...

Page 831: ...ntification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode day lunch break night on a trunk basis Shelf KX TDA600 only Indicates the shelf number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution reference only Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 12 6 10 4 MSN Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide R...

Page 832: ...l References None Feature Guide References None CLI Ring for MSN Day Lunch Break Night Enables CLI distribution in each time mode Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 6 10 4 MSN Table Programming Manual References 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Feature Guide References 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Identification CLI Distrib...

Page 833: ...ination Maintenance Console Location 12 7 10 5 Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND Intercept Routing to Operator No Destination Destination is not programmed Enables the Intercept Routing No Destination feature to activate when there is no destination for the call The Intercept Routing No Destination feature...

Page 834: ...ting feature to operate for extension calls Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 12 7 10 5 Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 7 Intercept Routing No Destination 834 PC Programming Manual 12 7 10 5 Miscellaneous ...

Page 835: ...Section 13 11 Maintenance PC Programming Manual 835 ...

Page 836: ...g Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR Format Port Selects the Serial Interface RS 232C port that is used to output the SMDR data Value Range None RS 232C Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR Format Page Length Number of L...

Page 837: ... page The number of lines for the skip perforation should be shorter than the page length Value Range 0 95 Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR Format Date Format Selects the printed date format Value Range MM DD YY DD MM YY YY MM DD YY DD MM Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 M...

Page 838: ...dialled digits of outgoing trunk calls are printed Class of Service COS programming determines the printable records Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings CO SMDR Outgoing CO Call Printout SMDR Feature Guide References 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Print Information Incoming Call ...

Page 839: ...rint Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Print Information Log in Log out Specifies whether the log in log out status is printed Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out 1 26...

Page 840: ...l Print Information Timed Reminder Wake up Call Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Feature Guide References 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 28 4 Timed Reminder Print Information Error Log Specifies whether PBX error log information is output to...

Page 841: ...ation 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 1 10 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR Options Caller ID Number Name Selects the printing format of caller identifications for incoming trunk calls Value Range None Number Name Name ...

Page 842: ...t Secret Print Dialled Number Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 1 Memory Dialling Features SUMMARY 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR Options Privacy Mode Selects whether private dialling is enabled or disabled and how many digits to hide when enabled To enable this setting Print Information Outgoing Call on...

Page 843: ...ed Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR Options Condition Code AN Specifies whether the time of answering an incoming trunk call is printed Value Range No Print Print Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Gu...

Page 844: ...l computer To ensure stable transmission when changing this setting to 57600 or 115200 bps set Communication Flow on this screen to Hardware Value Range 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps 19200 bps 38400 bps 57600 bps 115200 bps Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References 13 1 11 1 Main RS 232C Communication Flow Feature Guide References 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recordin...

Page 845: ...ogramming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Communication Word Length Specifies the number of bits in each byte of a character When connecting the Maintenance Console to the PBX using an RS 232C cable assign the following values to the Serial Interface RS 232C port of the PBX Word Length 8 bit Parity Bit None Stop Bit 1 bit Notice Do not u...

Page 846: ...icates the end of a bit string which composes a character Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the printer or personal computer Value Range 1 bit 2 bit Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR External Modem Command Automatic Initialisation Specifies the command to au...

Page 847: ...aracters Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 1 PC Programming Maintenance Local Alarm Display Extension 1 Extension 2 Specifies the extension numbers of PTs that will be notified by the PBX about local alarms When the PBX detects a PBX error the System Alarm button on the PT turns on red When this button is pressed the display...

Page 848: ...ming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 3 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time Hour Specifies the hour of the PBX daily self check start time Value Range 0 23 Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 3 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time Minute Specifies the minute of the PBX daily self check sta...

Page 849: ...on 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References 11 1 9 1 TIE Table Enhanced QSIG Call Information Optional SD Card Required 11 2 9 2 Network Data Transmission Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature Data Re transmission Repeat Counter Feature Guide References 1 30 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail Error Log for Centralised VM Network MSW Transmission Buffer Enables error information to b...

Page 850: ...ng Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 1 PC Programming Remote ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number for ISDN remote maintenance To enable this setting Remote Remote Programming on this screen must be enabled Value Range Max 5 digits consisting of 0 9 Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide...

Page 851: ...1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 1 PC Programming Remote Remote Maintenance Dial Number Own Telephone number for reference Specifies the telephone number of the PBX used to access the PBX from a remote location for maintenance purposes This number can be specified by Quick Setup Value Range Max 32 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location ...

Page 852: ...e Feature Guide References 2 3 2 PT Programming System Password PT Programming Prog Administrator Level Specifies the administrator level system password to authorise the PT user to access all system programming Value Range 4 10 digits consisting of 0 9 and Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 2 PT Programming Manager Password ...

Page 853: ...haracters Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 1 PC Programming System Password PC Programming Administrator Level Specifies the system password used to access Maintenance Console at Administrator Level This password can only be set in Interactive mode Value Range 4 10 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Prog...

Page 854: ...ccess Maintenance Console at Installer Level This password can only be set in Interactive mode Value Range 4 10 characters Maintenance Console Location 13 1 11 1 Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 1 PC Programming 854 PC Programming Manual 13 1 11 1 Main ...

Page 855: ...ference only Value Range 000 999 Maintenance Console Location 13 2 11 2 PT Programming Access Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 3 2 PT Programming PROG Selects whether User Level PT users can access each system programming item Value Range Disable Enable Maintenance Console Location 13 2 11 2 PT Programming Access Programming Manual References None Feature Guide Referen...

Page 856: ...ch to set connections from the Shelf list Note that PFT connections can only be made within the same shelf Trunk Card Slot No Specifies the position of the trunk card to be used Value Range None 1 11 Maintenance Console Location 13 3 11 3 Power Failure Transfer KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 4 1 Power Failure Transfer Extension Card...

Page 857: ...Section 14 Appendix PC Programming Manual 857 ...

Page 858: ...nly 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Parameter Selection for SDN KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Ext No Floating Ext No for SDN KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Intercept Destination Intercept Destination When Called Party is Busy Intercept No Answer Time Option 9 PDN Delayed Ringing KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 6 13 4 2 3 Portable...

Page 859: ...Break Night 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Loop CO Single CO Group CO ICD Group SDN 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Loop CO Single CO Group CO ICD Group SDN PC Programming Manual 859 14 1 1 KX TDA600 PLMPR Softwa...

Page 860: ...operty KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Message 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM 8 6 6 6 Tenant 10 6 8 5 Carrier Authorisation Code for Tenant 860 PC Programming Manua...

Page 861: ...O when TIE line does not work 9 5 7 5 Miscellaneous TRS Table Mode for Level N N 2_6 Changed Contents 1 1 2 Entering Characters 2 2 6 Start Menu Connect Modem 2 6 1 Utility Diagnosis 2 6 2 Utility File Transfer PC to PBX SD Card 3 1 1 1 Slot Supported Card Types 3 2 1 1 Slot Summary Card Type 4 17 2 9 System OptionsOption 4 Private Network TIE Call by Extension Numbering Optional SD Card Required ...

Page 862: ...Slot OPB3 Card Property KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 5 3 3 1 3 Caller ID Modification 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Message 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM 862 PC Programming Manual 14 1 4 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 ...

Page 863: ...9 5 7 5 Miscellaneous TRS Table Mode for Level N N 2_6 Changed Contents 1 1 2 Entering Characters 2 2 6 Start Menu Connect Modem 2 6 1 Utility Diagnosis 2 6 2 Utility File Transfer PC to PBX SD Card 3 1 1 1 Slot Supported Card Types 3 2 1 1 Slot Summary Card Type 3 33 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Gateway 4 17 2 9 System Options Option 4 Private Network TIE Call by Extension Numbering Optional SD Card...

Page 864: ... 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM SVM Cyclic Tone Option Tone Off Maximum Time 5 4 3 1 4 Dialling Plan 864 PC Programming Manual 14 1 5 KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 4 0xxx ...

Page 865: ...tarting the Maintenance Console 2 1 Introduction 2 3 File 2 4 Disconnect 2 5 Tool 2 6 Utility 5 3 3 1 3 Caller ID Modification 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button 6 9 4 1 7 Wired Extension Simplified Voice Message 6 16 4 2 5 Portable Station Simplified Voice Message 7 3 5 3 1 Voice Message DISA System 7 5 5 3 3 Voice Message SVM PC Programming Man...

Page 866: ...COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY Feature Guide References 1 21 1 3 Advice of Charge AOC Automatic Callback Busy Camp on 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Automatic Callback Busy Cancel 4 1...

Page 867: ...oute Selection ARS Automatic Setup 2 5 Tool 2 5 2 Tool BRI Automatic Configuration 4 1 2 1 Date Time Daylight Saving 4 17 2 9 System Options Option 2 Automatic Time Adjustment by ISDN Caller ID FSK Feature Guide References 2 3 5 Automatic Setup Background Music BGM 4 3 2 2 Operator BGM BGM and Music on Hold Music Source of BGM2 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only BGM and Music on Hold Music Source ...

Page 868: ...Current Usage 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Miscellaneous SVM Recording Time SVM Dial Tone Continuous Time 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Simplified Voice Message Access 5 1 3 1 1 Trunk Group TRG Settings Tone Detection Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection Silence Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection Continuous Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection Cyclic 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extens...

Page 869: ...After Decimal Point Charge Options Currency Charge Options Currency Display Position Charge Options Action at Charge Limit Charge Options Meter Start on Answer Detection Feature Guide References 1 26 3 Call Charge Services Call Forwarding FWD 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features FWD No Answer Timer Set 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings CO SMDR Call Forward to CO Programming Manager Group ...

Page 870: ...5 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P Call Forwarding CF by QSIG 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Supplementary Service COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR CF Rerouting CT CCBS AOC D AOC E 3PTY Feature Guide References 1 30 4 3 Call Fo...

Page 871: ...xtension Settings Option 3 Executive Override Deny Feature Guide References 1 8 3 Call Monitor Call Park 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Recall Call Park Recall Recall Disconnect after Recall 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Call Park Call Park Retrieve 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for Call Park Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Call Park 6 13 4 2 ...

Page 872: ...SMDR Transfer to CO 4 17 2 9 System Options Option 4 DSS Key Automatic Transfer for Extension Call Transfer Transfer to busy Extension without BSS Operation 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 1 Transfer Recall Destination 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 1 Transfer Recall Destination Feature Guide References 1 12 1 Call Transfer Call Transfer CT by ISDN 3 14 1...

Page 873: ...nual C Waiting for Extension Call Option 2 Automatic C Waiting Option 4 Call Waiting Tone Type 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 2 Manual C Waiting for Extension Call Option 2 Automatic C Waiting Option 4 Call Waiting Tone Type Feature Guide References 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting Call Waiting Tone 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Miscellaneous Caller ID Visual Caller ID Display 4 10 2 6 3 Numb...

Page 874: ...for DIL CLI Ring for DIL Day Lunch Break Night 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table CLI Ring for DDI DID Day Lunch Break Night 12 6 10 4 MSN Table CLI Ring for MSN Day Lunch Break Night Feature Guide References 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection 3 11 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port CPC Signal Detection Time Outgoing Incoming 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Proper...

Page 875: ...ISDN CLIP COLR 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings ISDN CLIP CLIP ID ISDN CLIP CLIP on Extension CO ISDN CLIP CLIR ISDN CLIP COLR 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Type Feature Guide References 1 21 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Calling Connected Line Identification Pres...

Page 876: ...ralised VM Network MSW Transmission Counter Error Log for Centralised VM Network MSW Transmission Buffer Feature Guide References 1 30 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail Class of Service COS 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main COS 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Main COS Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Completion of ...

Page 877: ... CTI Feature Guide References 1 32 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Conference 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf Unattended Conference Recall Start Timer Unattended Conference Warning Tone Start Timer Unattended Conference Disconnect Timer 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings CO SMDR Transfer to CO 4 17 2 9 System Options Option 3 Confirmation Tone Tone 4 1 Start Conference...

Page 878: ...5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for TRS Level Change 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Parameter Selection for TRS Level Change 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Type Parameter Selection for TRS Level Change Feature Guide References 1 9 4 Dial Tone Transfer Dial Type Selection 3 11 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Dialling Mode DTMF Width Pulse Speed 3 19 1 1 Slot...

Page 879: ...ming Call Inter digit Timer DDI DID 12 2 10 2 DIL Table Port Settings DDI DID TIE MSN Distribution Method DDI DID TIE MSN Remove Digit DDI DID TIE MSN Additional Dial 12 3 10 3 DDI DID Table Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Direct Inward System Access DISA 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf DISA Delayed Answer Timer DISA Mute OGM Sta...

Page 880: ...Options Option 5 PT Feature Access No 1 8 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 5 Display Language Incoming Call Display Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 5 Display Language Incoming Call Display Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Charge Charge Options Digits After Decimal Point Charge Options Curre...

Page 881: ...oorphone Call 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings TRS TRS Level Day Lunch Break Night 4 15 2 8 2 Ring Tone Patterns Call from Doorphone 4 17 2 9 System Options Option 3 Confirmation Tone Tone 1 Called by Voice 7 1 5 1 Doorphone Feature Guide References 1 17 1 Doorphone Call E1 Line Service 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port 3 26 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Connection Command Feature Guide...

Page 882: ...1 Numbering Plan Main Features Extension Feature Clear 4 17 2 9 System Options Option 2 Extension Clear Call Waiting Extension Clear Fwd DND Extension Clear Hot Line Pickup Dial Feature Guide References 1 28 2 Extension Feature Clear Extension Personal Identification Number PIN 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Miscellaneous Extension PIN Lock Counter 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Extension PIN Set...

Page 883: ... External Feature Access EFA External Relay Control 3 41 1 1 Slot OPB3 Card Property KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Device Type 3 45 1 1 Slot Card Property DPH type KX TDA30 only For Output EIO Device Type 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features External Relay Access 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Optional Device Other Extensions External Relay Access 7 6 5 4 External Relay Feature Gu...

Page 884: ...inate Flexible Buttons 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Miscellaneous PT Display PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button 6 6 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Flexible button data copy 6 7 4 1 5 Wired Extension PF Button 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Feature Guide References 1 20 2 Flexible Buttons Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbe...

Page 885: ...nsion 4 17 2 9 System Options Option 1 PT Fwd DND Fwd LED PT Fwd DND DND LED PT Fwd DND Fwd DND key mode when Idle 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings FWD DND Reference 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Group FWD Both Ext No Floating Ext No for Group FWD External Ext No Floating Ext No for Group FWD Internal 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Set...

Page 886: ...on Settings Option 8 Wrap up Timer Feature Guide References 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution Hands free Answerback 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Tone Length Reorder Tone for PT Hands free 4 17 2 9 System Options Option 1 PT Operation Automatic Answer for Call from CO after Option 3 Confirmation Tone Tone 2 Paged Automatic Answer Option 4 Transfer Automatic Answer for Transferred Cal...

Page 887: ...ephone Company from a Host PBX Hot Line 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Dial IRNA Recall Tone Dial Hot Line Pickup Dial Start 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Hot Line Pickup Dial Program Set Cancel 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 2 Pickup Dial Set Pickup Dial No 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 2 Pickup Dial Set Pickup Dial No Feature Guide References 1 6 1 ...

Page 888: ...ferences 1 18 2 Incoming Call Log Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 2 5 2 Tool BRI Automatic Configuration 3 13 1 1 Slot Card Property BRI type PRI type 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port 3 15 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Connection Command 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 3 17 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port Connection Command KX TDA100 KX TDA200...

Page 889: ...BGM PBX Operator Day Lunch Break Night 12 7 10 5 Miscellaneous Intercept Routing to Operator No Destination Destination is not programmed Feature Guide References 1 1 1 7 Intercept Routing No Destination Intercom Call 4 10 2 6 3 Numbering Plan B NA DND Call Feature Alternate Calling Ring Voice 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Main Extension Number Main Extension Name Option 3 Intercom ...

Page 890: ...uide References 1 31 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT ISDN Extension 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port ISDN Extension 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Extension Setting Feature Guide References 1 21 1 11 ISDN Extension ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Dial for ISDN Service 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Fle...

Page 891: ...red Extension Extension Settings Option 7 Outgoing Call Log Memory 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 7 Outgoing Call Log Memory Feature Guide References 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial LED Indication 4 17 2 9 System Options Option 1 PT Fwd DND Fwd LED Option 1 PT Fwd DND DND LED Option 4 DSS Key DSS key mode for Incoming Call Feature Guide References 1 20 3 LED Indication Line Prefe...

Page 892: ...ady Manual Wrap up Mode On Off 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Miscellaneous No of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log out Last Extension Log out 5 16 3 5 3 Incoming Call Distribution Group Miscellaneous Options Wrap up Timer based on 5 14 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Member List Wrap up Timer 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 8 ...

Page 893: ...ing Plan B NA DND Call Feature Message Waiting Set 4 17 2 9 System Options Option 3 Dial Tone Distinctive Dial Tone Option 5 SLT Message Waiting Lamp Pattern KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings VM DTMF Command Listening Message 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 8 SLT MW Mode KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexi...

Page 894: ...roperty BRI Port ISDN CO Networking Data Transfer 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only CO Setting Networking Data Transfer 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manager Manager 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Dial for NDSS 6 8 4 1 6 Wired Extension NDSS Link Data Send 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Dial for NDSS 6 1...

Page 895: ...2 Off hook Monitor One touch Dialling 6 1 4 1 1 Wired Extension Extension Settings Option 6 Flexible Button Programming Mode 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Dial for One touch 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 6 Flexible Button Programming Mode 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Dial for One touch 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Type Dial for One touch Feature...

Page 896: ... when ICD Group with Cellular Phone Feature Guide References 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group Overflow Feature 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Overflow Queuing Busy Overflow No Answer 5 15 3 5 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Queuing Time Table Feature Guide References 1 2 2 6 Overflow Feature Paging 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Feature...

Page 897: ...vels 13 1 11 1 Main Password Feature Guide References 2 3 3 Password Security Pause Insertion 3 11 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Pause Time 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Pause Time 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Pause Time 3 28 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Pause Time 3 31 1 1 Slot Port Property DID Port Pause Time...

Page 898: ... Ext No Floating Ext No for SDN KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Type Parameter Selection for SDN KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Ext No Floating Ext No for SDN KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Loop CO Single CO Group CO ICD Group SDN Feature Guide References 1 7 1 Primary Directory Number PDN Secondary Directory Number SD...

Page 899: ...Feature Guide References 1 25 3 PS Directory PS Ring Group 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Main Distribution Method 5 25 3 9 PS Ring Group 5 26 3 9 PS Ring Group Member List Feature Guide References 1 25 2 PS Ring Group PS Roaming by Network ICD Group 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Miscellaneous System Wireless PS Out of Range Timer 4 17 2 9 System Options Option 4 System Wirel...

Page 900: ...f Busy Extension 5 19 3 7 1 VM DPT Group System Settings Call Waiting on VM Group 5 22 3 8 1 VM DTMF Group System Settings Others Call Waiting on VM Group 6 5 4 1 4 Wired Extension Flexible Button Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Hurry up 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Hurry up 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Hurry up Feature Guide R...

Page 901: ... 17 4 3 DSS Console Type 8 2 6 2 Hotel Charge Main Hotel Operator Extension 1 4 Bill Checkout Billing Billing for Guest Need MEC Card Feature Guide References 1 27 2 Room Status Control Software Upgrading 3 3 1 1 Slot Card Property MPR Memory Version Feature Guide References 2 3 8 Software Upgrading Special Carrier Access Code 9 3 7 3 Special Carrier Feature Guide References 1 5 4 9 Special Carrie...

Page 902: ...5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Miscellaneous Supervisor Extension Number Feature Guide References 1 2 2 8 Supervisory Feature T1 Line Service 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only 3 20 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port Connection Command KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Feature Guide References 1 23 1 T1 Line Service Tenant Service 4 3 2 2 Opera...

Page 903: ...perty 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Network Numbering Plan Trunk Property 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Trunk Property 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Trunk Property 3 28 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Trunk Property 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters Miscellaneous Incoming Call Inter dig...

Page 904: ...e Service 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Type Parameter Selection for Time Service Parameter Selection for Time Service Automatic Manual Optional Parameter Ringing Tone Type Number for Time Service Feature Guide References 2 2 4 Time Service Timed Reminder 4 4 2 3 Timers Counters DISA Door Reminder U Conf Timed Reminder Repeat Counter Timed Reminder Interval Time Timed Reminder Alarm Ringing Duration 4 8 2 ...

Page 905: ...ction 3 11 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Connection 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Connection 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Connection 3 19 1 1 Slot Port Property T1 Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Connection 3 25 1 1 Slot Port Property E1 Port Connection 3 28 1 1 Slot Port Property EM Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Connection 3 31...

Page 906: ...ging EPG External Pager KX TDA30 only 7 2 5 2 External Pager Feature Guide References 1 17 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Trunk Busy Out 3 11 1 1 Slot Port Property LCO Port Busy Out Status 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Busy Out Cancel 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Programming Manager Manager 4 17 2 9 System Options Option 4 Busy Out Busy Out for Analogue CO Feature Guid...

Page 907: ...ion Code Entry VIP Call 5 13 3 5 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Settings Miscellaneous VIP Call Mode Feature Guide References 1 2 2 5 VIP Call Virtual Private Network VPN 3 14 1 1 Slot Port Property BRI Port Network Numbering Plan Trunk Property 3 16 1 1 Slot Port Property PRI Port KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Network Numbering Plan Trunk Property 10 2 8 2 Leading Number Leading Nu...

Page 908: ...Ext No Floating Ext No for Two way Record Ext No Floating Ext No for Two way Transfer Ext No Floating Ext No for Voice Mail Transfer Ext No of Mailbox for Two way Transfer 6 10 4 2 1 Portable Station Extension Settings Option 4 LCS Recording Mode 6 13 4 2 3 Portable Station Flexible Button Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Two way Record Ext No Floating Ext No for Two way Transfer Ext No Floating Ex...

Page 909: ... Station Flexible Button Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Voice Mail Transfer 6 17 4 3 DSS Console Type Ext No Floating Ext No for Voice Mail Transfer Feature Guide References 1 24 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network 3 37 1 1 Slot Card Property IP Extension Common Settings Gateway Address Feature Guide References 1 30 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network W...

Page 910: ...17 2 9 System Options Option 5 Whisper OHCA for SLT APT KX T72xx Feature Guide References 1 8 4 4 Whisper OHCA Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 3 5 1 1 Slot Port Property Extension Port DPT Type Type 3 48 1 2 Portable Station PS Registration and De registration 4 8 2 6 1 Numbering Plan Main Features Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set Cancel 4 11 2 7 1 Class of Service COS Settings Optional Device Other Exte...

Page 911: ...PC Programming Manual 911 Notes ...

Page 912: ... This material is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co Ltd and may be reproduced for internal use only All other reproduction in whole or in part is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic Communications Co Ltd Panasonic Communications Co Ltd 2005 KK0805ET8118 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for HYBRID IP-PBX KX-TDA100

Aastra DT590 Quick Reference Manual preview
DT590
Brand: Aastra Pages: 2
Aastra CORDLESS PHONE Installation Planning preview
CORDLESS PHONE
Brand: Aastra Pages: 49
Aastra DT412 Quick Reference Manual preview
DT412
Brand: Aastra Pages: 2
Aastra CM-16 Installation Instructions preview
CM-16
Brand: Aastra Pages: 4
Aastra CM-16 Technician Installation Manual preview
CM-16
Brand: Aastra Pages: 7
Aastra Aastra 610d Quick User Manual preview
Aastra 610d
Brand: Aastra Pages: 30
Aastra Clearspan 6757i Quick Use Manual preview
Clearspan 6757i
Brand: Aastra Pages: 2
Aastra 5370 Quick User Manual preview
5370
Brand: Aastra Pages: 5
Aastra 612d Quick User Manual preview
612d
Brand: Aastra Pages: 4
Aastra Clearspan 6757i Quick Reference Manual preview
Clearspan 6757i
Brand: Aastra Pages: 2
Panasonic KX-TG8070E Quick Manual preview
KX-TG8070E
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 8
Panasonic KX-TG7331FX Quick Manual preview
KX-TG7331FX
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 10
Panasonic KX-TG6021 Operating Instructions Manual preview
KX-TG6021
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 56
Panasonic KX-TG2267B - GigaRange - 2.4 GHz Digital Cordless... Operating Instructions Manual preview
KX-TG2267B - GigaRange - 2.4 GHz Digital Cordless...
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 72
Jacob Jensen IP60N User Manual preview
IP60N
Brand: Jacob Jensen Pages: 16
Topcom DESKMASTER 122+ User Manual preview
DESKMASTER 122+
Brand: Topcom Pages: 31
PhoneMate PM5805 Instruction Manual preview
PM5805
Brand: PhoneMate Pages: 37
Wesco WS2933 Manual preview
WS2933
Brand: Wesco Pages: 32

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands